Home

&Scaron;KODA Octavia Owner`s Manual

1. A Abroad Driving abroad 131 ABS Function 133 Warning light 17 ACC 143 Accessories 200 Adaptive cruise control 143 automatic stop start 146 Information messages 149 Instructions and Information 143 Operation 145 Operation Overview 146 Radar sensor 144 Set change the desired speed 147 Set time interval level 148 special driving conditions 148 Start control 146 Stop resume control 147 Adaptive headlights AFS 54 Adjust Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion TTT Adjusting Exterior mirrors 66 Head restraints 69 Interior mirror 65 Manual air conditioning 106 Seats 67 68 Adjusting the seats 67 172 Adjustment Headlight beam __ C CSCSCSCSCS S P Aerial 193 AFS 54 262 Index Airbag 180 Deactivating 185 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 186 Deployment 180 Front airbag 182 Head airbag 184 Knee airbag 183 Modifications and damage to the airbag system 202 Side airbag 183 Air bag Warning light 18 Airbag system 180 Air conditioning system Air outlets 102 Climatronic 107 Manual air conditioning system 105 Air outlets 102 Alarm Switching off 39 Triggering 39 Anti theft alarm system Activating deactivating 39 Trailer 169 Antilock Braking System 133 Area monitoring system 149 Armrest front 72 rear 72 Artificial leather 199 Ashtray 78 ASR warning light 16 Assistant syst
2. gt Open the luggage compartment lid Selector lever emergency unlocking Fig 210 Selector lever emergency unlocking mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 239 gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Open the stowage compartment in front centre console page 77 gt Grab hold of the cover 1 in the areas of the arrows and carefully raise it in the direction of the arrow 2 forwards and then backwards Fig 210 gt Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 3 gt At the same time press the locking button in the selector lever and move the selector lever to position N If the selector lever is moved again to position P it is once again blocked CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the windscreen wiper blades __ CC Replacing the rear window wiper blade 242 FJ warnine Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons These can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig 271 Windscreen wiper blade B5E 0059 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade put the windscreen wiper arms into the service position Service position for changing wiper blades gt Closing the bonnet gt Switch the ignition off and on
3. Locking 36 Unlocking 36 Inertia rel _ C783 Information display 27 Information display 27 Information message see KESSY 38 Information system SSCS A S Door warning __ CS C CSSS S SCSSS SSSSCULL 26 Eco tips i y 26 Information on the display 25 143 Multifunction display 28 Outside temperature 5 Recommended gear 26 Information System Laptimer 26 Stopwatch 26 Instrument cluster 9 Auto check control 13 Counter for distance driven 12 Display 10 Fuel gauge TI Overview 9 Revolutions counter 10 see Instrument cluster 9 Service interval 12 Speedometer 10 Temperature gauge T Viewing the charge level of the vehicle battery 12 Warning icons 20 Warning lights 14 Interior monitor 40 ISOFIX 191 J Jack 228 Jacking points Raise vehicle 231 Jump starting 235 266 Index K KESSY Information message 38 lock 38 Starting the engine 118 Switching off the engine 118 Switching off the ignition 118 Switching on the ignition 118 unlock 38 Unlocking locking the steering 117 Key Locking 33 Starting the engine 115 Stopping the engine 116 Unlocking 33 Knee airbag 183 L Lane Assist 158 Activating deactivating 160 Explanation of situations 160 Information messages 160 Operation 159 Warning light 19 Laptimer 26 LEAVING HOME 57 Lever Main beam 53 Turn signal 5
4. Looking ahead 126 Shifting gears and saving energy 127 Avoiding full throttle 127 Reducing idling 127 Avoiding short distances 128 Convenience consumers 128 Checking tyre inflation pressure 128 Avoiding unnecessary ballast 128 Regular maintenance 129 Environmental compatibility 129 126 Driving The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the ve hicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works SKODA places a partic ular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness Fuel consumption environmental pollution and the wear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors gt your personal style of driving gt the conditions under which your vehicle is use gt technical requirements The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult condi tions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a result of outside temperatures the weather and driving style The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating in or
5. Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 162 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist l CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not damage the door trim or other parts of the interior Seat belts 177 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats Fig 164 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc tion Fig 164 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has cor rectly locked in place CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Intertia reel 178 Belt tensioners 178 Intertia reel Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 178 Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel 178 Safety When pulling slowly on the seat belt the belt can move freely When pulling sharply on the seat belt the movement is locked by the inertia reel The belts also block when during full brak
6. In the event that the parking procedure cannot be carried out in one go the park ing process is completed in further stages gt If the arrow in the display is flashing to the front Fig 133 c engage 1st gear or move the selector lever into the position D gt Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully drive forwards gt When the arrow in the display is flashing towards the rear Fig 133 D engage the reverse gear or move the selector lever to the position R gt Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully reverse You can repeat these steps several times in succession As soon as the parking procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display O Steering interv finished Take over steering Explanation of graphic A Parking place recognised with the information to drive on Parking place recognised with the information to engage the reverse gear Indication for selecting the forward gear D Indication for selecting the reverse gear Automatic termination The system terminates the parking procedure if one of the following cases arises gt Speed of more than 7 km h repeatedly exceeded during the parking procedure gt Time limit of 6 minutes exceeded for the parking procedure gt System button pressed
7. Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about 5 C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro vide cooling at a high load of the engine CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold i Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a specialist garage once every year Control elements Fig 110 Air conditioning Control elements First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Functions of the individual controls Fig 110 A Set the temperature turn to the left Turn to the right to reduce the temper ature increase temperature Set the blower stage stage O Blower off stage 6 the highest blower stage Set the direction of the air outlet page 102 1 Depending on equipment gt Switching the windscreen heater on off page 60 gt 3 Switching the auxiliary heater on off page 111 A C Switch the cooling system on off Switch the rear window heater on off page 60 Open close the fresh air supply
8. 226 Winter tyres 22 Winter tyres See Wheels 226 X XDS 134 Index 271 SKODA AUTO a s pursues a policy of constant product and model development We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The information about appearance performances dimensions weight standards and functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication Some equipment might only be introduced at a later date or is only offered in certain markets Information is pro vided by SKODA partners It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner s Man ual Reprinting duplicating translating and any other use either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA AUTO a s SKODA AUTO a s expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws Subject to change Issued by KODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s 2013 SKODA Service App SKODA Service in your pocket The SKODA Service application is designed for smartphones operating on iOS and Andriod systems and its purpose is to help SKODA AUTO customers in any difficult situation they may encounter on their travels My dealer choose your nearest or preferred Service Centre Assistance contact the Assistance Service or your favourite dealer My car complete Owner s Manual and summary list
9. CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the multifunction box is 3 kg CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Positions of the variable loading floor 95 Fold up variable loading floor 96 Dividing the luggage compartment 96 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg For the trans port of heavy loads adjust the variable loading floor in the lower posi tion page 95 g Note The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects for example the removed roll up luggage compartment cover roof cross bars etc page 91 Positions of the variable loading floor Fig 97 Set variable loading floor to the upper position variable loading floor in the upper position Fig 98 Set variable loading floor to the lower position variable loading floor in the lower position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 94 The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position Set to the upper position gt Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A Fig 97 gt Lift the variable loading floor about 20 cm pull it to yourself and raise it in the direction of the arrow 1 to the level of the roll up luggage compartment cover until it clicks After an audib
10. EI WARNING No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover Stowing roll up luggage compartment cover and roof racks Fig 89 Removing the side covers stowing roof racks properly B5E 0219 Fig 90 Stowing roll up luggage compartment cover stowing roof racks and roll up luggage compartment cover properly First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor the removed roll up lug gage compartment cover and the roof racks can be stowed in the recesses of the luggage compartment side trim Stowing the roof racks gt Fold the variable loading floor in the upper position page 96 gt Remove the side covers of the luggage compartment in the direction of the ar row 1 Fig 89 gt Insert the front roof rack A into the front recesses of the side trim gt Insert the rear roof rack B into the rear recesses of the side trim gt Replace the side trims of the luggage compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 gt Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position page 95 Stowing the roll up luggage compartment cover gt Fold the variable loading floor in the upper position page 96 gt Remove the side covers of the luggage compartment in the direction of the ar row 1 Fig 89 gt Insert the front part of the roll up luggage compartment cover under a portion of the side trim
11. Fig 163 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother 1 Not valid for sport seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 Fasten gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 172 gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis gt Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle Fig 162 A that is part of the seat until it clicks into place gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maxi mum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be positioned across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 163 QO Expectant women must also always wear a Seat belt This is the only way of en suring optimal protection for the unborn child On expectant mothers the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as pos sible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen Fig 163 D
12. bil Note a The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life If you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag must be included a When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to com ply with the national legal requirements Airbag deployment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 180 The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultaneous ly The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which oc curs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the rele vant restraint system If the vehicl
13. 44 Using the system Examples of operational malfunctions eee of the malfunc Possible solutions The lid cannot be lifted out of the lock Emergency unlocking of the lid page 240 Remove any obstacle e g snow open the lid The lid does not reacttoan again page 42 opening signal Press the handle A and pull the lid upwards The lid remains in the top po sition CQO Introduction Manual closing of the lid This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening closing the window from the driver seat SC lt C S S Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors 46 Force limiter 46 Window convenience operation 46 Operational faults 47 The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is switched on After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the windows for approx 10 minutes The electrical power windows are only switched off com pletely once the driver s door or front passenger door are opened When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds FJ WARNING a Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking the vehicle In an emergency the windows will no longer
14. 91 Stowing roof racks 91 Unlocking the tailgate 240 Variable loading floor 94 Luggage compartment cover 89 Luggage compartment cover Octavia Estate ___ 90 Luggage compartment lid 40 close 41 open 41 Luggage net 89 M Main beam 53 Warning light 20 Maintenance 129 Decorative films 196 Manual air conditioning adjusting 106 Recirculated air mode 106 Manual gear changing See Gear changing 121 Manually setting air conditioning Control elements 105 Map pockets on the front seats 82 Memory 30 Mirror Additional interior mirror 65 Exterior mirrors 66 Mirrors Interior mirror 65 Vanity 61 Modes of the automatic transmission 122 Modifications 200 Modifications and technical alterations Airbags 202 Service 201 Spoiler 201 Multicollision brake 135 Multifunction box 93 Multifunction box Octavia Estate 94 Multifunction display Functions 28 Information 28 Memory 30 Select information 30 N Net partition 96 Behind the front seats 98 Behind the rear seats 97 Removing and refitting the housing 98 Nets 87 Normal mode 157 O Oil See Engine oil 211 Onboard computer see multifunction display 28 Operation in winter De icing windows 196 Diesel fuel 206 Vehicle battery 217 Outside temperature 25 Overview Engine compartment 209 Warning icons 20 Warning lights 14 p
15. CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 2 5 kg in weight in total a The cargo element is designed for attaching objects with a maximum gross weight of 8 kg a When using the storage compartment take care not to damage it or the lug gage compartment lining 92 Using the system i Note We recommend you use the cargo element to secure items of luggage behind the rear seats Storage compartments under the floor covering Z B5E 0231 Fig 92 Lift floor covering storage compartments under the floor covering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The storage compartments are located under the floor covering of the luggage compartment in vehicles without a spare wheel Use gt Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor page 96 gt Remove the fog floor covering in the direction of the arrow Fig 92 gt Fix the hook B to the top edge of the variable loading floor It is possible to store also objects with larger heights in the storage compart ments A thereby using the maximum height of the luggage compartment CAUTION An item of luggage weighing up to 15 kg can be stored in each storage compart ment a Do not stored any sharp objects in the storage compartments a Do not load the storage compartments at specific points or they may be dam aged a Place the objects carefully into the st
16. CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle e g damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident SA For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump tion i Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle You have opted for a SKODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities The new operating concept allows you to make vehicle settings and to operate electronic systems centrally from the Infotainment sys tem In addition to this Owner s Manual please also carefully read the Infotainment operating manual because operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle Observe the national legal requirements when using your vehicle If you have any questions about your vehicle please contact a KODA Partner We hope you enjoy driving your SKODA and wish you a pleasant journey at all times Your SKODA AUTO ass hereinafter referred to only as SKODA or manufacturer On board literature The on board literature for your vehicle consists of this owner s manual as well as a service schedule and the Help on the road brochure
17. Fig 194 B F WARNING The first aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants W Note Pay attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit We recommend using a first aid box from SKODA Original Accessories available from a SKODA Partner Emergency equipment and self help 227 Fire extinguisher Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 227 The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguish er The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year The national legal requirements must be observed EI warnine The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants A Note a The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements a Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher If the fire extin guisher is used after the expiration date its proper function is not assured a The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only 228 Do it yourself Vehicle tool kit Fig 195 Vehicle tool kit Co First read and
18. IGNITION STILL ON Starting the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light o gt comes on after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine just after the indicator light o gt goes out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating pe riod otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Place the gearshift lever into neutral or place the selector lever in the position P or N and firmly put on the handbrake gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt Press the starter button Fig 117 on page 117 briefly the engine starts gt Release the handbrake Vehicles with manual transmission The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the information cluster display Press the clutch to start 8 PRESS CLUTCH Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed 118 Driving The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the following mes sage is displayed on the display Apply the brake to start APPLY BRAKE Switching off the ignition First read and obs
19. If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment the roll up luggage compart ment cover can be removed page 90 Seats and useful equipment 97 Using the net partition behind the front seats Fig 104 aga Net partition behind the front seats in the pulled out state B p B5E 0206 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 96 Pulling out gt Fold the rear seats forward page 73 gt Pull out the net partition at the upper crossbar A from the housing Fig 104 gt Hook the crossbar into one of the receptacles C gt On the other side press on the crossbar and hook it into the appropriate recep tacle c If the crossbar is hooked into the receptacle C to the left for example then press on the crossbar in the direction of the arrow 1 and insert into the receptacle C to the right Folding gt Press on the crossbar and remove it from the receptacles C first on one side then on the other side gt Hold the crossbar A in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold the rear seats back into their original positions page 73 CAUTION If the net partition blocks when pulling it out of the housing push the release lev er A in the direction of the arrow Fig 103 on page 97 98 Using the system Removing and refitting the net partition housing Figs 105 Rear seats R
20. The auxiliary heating parking heating is switched off gt Depending on the settings in the Infotainment Infotainment manual chap ter Vehicle settings gt if the fuel level has reached the reserve area the warning icon R lights up gt if the charge state of the vehicle battery is too low page 215 Radio remote control Fig 113 Auxiliary heater Radio remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 110 Explanation of graphic a Aerial Warning light Switch on the auxiliary heating Switch off the auxiliary heating The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle When the battery is fully charged the range of the remote control is a few hun dred metres Obstacles between the radio remote control and the vehicle bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the range To switch the auxiliary heating on or off hold the remote control vertical with the aerial pointing upwards The antenna must not be covered with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process The auxiliary heating can only be switched on off safely using the radio remote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m Heating and air conditioning system 111 After pressing the button the warning light in the remote control gives
21. The warning lights lt 3 indicate a fault or the state of the automatic gearbox 14 Using the system The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in the display of the instrument cluster After switching on the ignition some warning lights illuminate briefly as a func tion test If the tested systems are OK the corresponding warning lights go out a few sec onds after switching on the ignition The condition of some features and systems is shown by the warning icons on the display page 20 The warning lights are at the following locations in the instrument cluster Fig 2 on page 9 gt Revolutions counter 1 gt Speedometer 3 gt Bar with warning lights 5 E WARNING a Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 57 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescri bed distance observe the national legal provisions when doing so The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 206 Engine compartment Messa
22. gt Adjust the ball rod to the ready position page 165 gt Grab the ball rod from underneath Fig 155 and insert into the mounting re cess until it audibly clicks E Lever 1 turns upwards automatically and the release pin 2 pops out its red and green parts are visible H If the lever 1 does not turn automatically or if the trigger pin 2 does not come out remove the ball rod from the mounting recess by turning the lever down wards as far as it can go Clean the wedge surfaces on the ball rod and the mounting recess gt Lock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key 3 by 180 to the right see green marking is visible and remove the key in the direction of the arrow gt Insert the cap 4 on the lock in the direction of the arrow V gt Check the ball rod for proper attachment page 166 F WARNING Keep your hands outside the lever s range of motion when attaching the ball rod risk of finger injuries a Never attempt to pull the operating lever violently upwards to turn the key Doing so would mean the ball rod is not attached correctly Towing a trailer 165 CAUTION a After removing the key always replace the cap on the lock of the operating lev er there is a risk of dirt getting into the lock a Keep the mounting recess of the towing device clean at all times Such dirt pre vents the ball rod from being attached securely a After removing the ball rod always place t
23. gt Heating of the external mirror gt Rear fog light gt Fog lights gt Heated front seats gt Auxiliary heating parking heating Information about convenience consumers and the amount of fuel con sumed operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Up to three convenience consumers are displayed in the Infotainment display the top 3 in terms of energy consumption Checking tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct If the inflation pressure is too low the tyres must overcome a higher rolling resistance This will not only in crease fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Avoiding unnecessary ballast First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption Therefore we rec ommend to carry no unnecessary weight It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the ve hicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of abo
24. 14 Warning lights Warning symbols see Warning lights 14 20 see Warning symbols Warning triangle Washing Automatic car wash system by hand Chrome parts High pressure cleaner Water Driving through Wax treatment See Taking care of your vehicle Weights Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolt Caps Loosening and tightening Wheel rims Wheels Bolts Changing Full trim General information Load index Low profile tyres Replacing wheels 227 193 193 193 196 194 130 195 254 232 225 231 220 225 229 225 220 222 223 221 Service life of tyres 221 Snow chains 226 Spare wheel 224 Speed symbol 223 Storing wheels 221 Tyre pressure 221 Tyre sizes 221 Tyre wear indicator 221 Winter tyres 226 Window convenience operation 46 Windows De icing 196 See Electrical power windows 44 Window wiper Replacing the rear window wiper blade lt 242 Windscreen Heater CBD Windscreen washer fluid Checking 209 Replenishing 209 Warning icon 23 Winter 209 Windscreen washers Windscreen washers 63 Windscreen washer system 209 Windscreen wipers Operating 63 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 241 Windscreen washer fluid 209 Windscreen wipers and washers 62 Winter operation 226 Snow chains
25. EI warnine a Automatic brake assist only works as an element of the assist function The driver must always be ready to brake the vehicle him herself a Automatic brake assist is ended after around 1 5 seconds Depress the brak ing pedal so that the vehicle does not start moving by itself Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 137 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Park Assist stopped Speed too high Reduce speed to under 40 km h parallel parking 20 km h perpendicular park ing This message is only displayed at speeds up to around 50 km h When the speed exceeds 50 km h activate the system again with the symbol button Pe Speed too high Take over steering The parking procedure was ended because the speed was exceeded Park with a max speed of 7 km h Park Assist stopped Driver steer intervent The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention Park Assist stopped ASR deactivated The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the TCS system is deactiva ted Activate the TCS ASR deactivated Take over steering The parking procedure was ended because TCS was deactivated during the park ing procedure Trailer Park Assist stopped The parking procedure cannot be carried out because a trailer is hitched Time limit exceeded Take over steering The p
26. Warning against excessive speeds Set the speed limit for example for the maximum permissible speed in town page 31 Traffic sign recognition The display can show up to three of the following traffic signs simultaneously gt Maximum permissible speed including additional signs gt Overtaking prohibited Further information page 161 Traffic sign recognition 1 The units for the displayed consumption are set in the Infotainment Bedienungsanleitung Infotain ment chapter Device Settings 2 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litres if the vehicle is sta tionary Current driving speed The current speed is identical to the display on the speedometer 3 Fig 2 on page 9 Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km hour page 30 To determine the average speed over a certain period of time set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement page 30 After erasing the memory no average speed data will appear for the first 300 m driven The average speed data is updated regularly while you are driving Distance travelled The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display If you want to measure the distance travelled from a particular moment in time on at this moment reset the memory by setting the button to zero page 30 The maximum distance indicated is 9999 km The indicator
27. Width Width including exterior mirror 1814 1814 1814 1814 Height Clearance Basic dimension Vehicles with a rough road package Vehicles with a SPORT package Basic dimension Vehicles with a rough road package Vehicles with a SPORT package Wheel base Basic dimension Vehicles with the 1 8 1 132 kW TSI engine Track gauge front rear Rim dimensions 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI 1549 1520 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI 1549 1520 1 4 Itr 103 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 132 kW TSI 2 0 ltr 162 kW TSI 1543 1514 1543 1512 Track gauge front rear Rim dimensions 1 6 Itr 66 kW TDI 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI 2 0 ltr 105 kW TDI 1535 1506 2 0 Itr 110 kW TDI 2 0 Itr 135 kW TDI 1549 1520 1549 1520 1543 1514 1543 1514 1535 1506 256 Technical data Vehicle specific information depending on engine type AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 254 The specified values were obtained in accordance with rules and conditions that are set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and techni cal data of motor vehicles 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 63 4300 5300 160 1400 3500 4 1197 OCTAVIA MG5 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG5 Top speed km h 181 178 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 0
28. f for example the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possi ble that the sliding tilting roof does not operate correctly Next move the rotary switch into position A Fig 27 on page 49 pull it and hold onto the recess downwards and forwards tightly The sliding tilting roof opens and closes again after around 10 seconds Do not release the control dial until it has done so If for example the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possi ble that the sun screen does not operate correctly Then turn the switch to posi tion A Fig 27 on page 49 and press and hold the button G Fig 28 on page 49 The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds Do not release the control dial until it has done so Operation Fig 27 Control dial for the sliding tilting roof P B5E 0194 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 48 Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 27 When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Open partially gt Turn the switch to a position in area D Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned po sition Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position A gt Press the switch in the region E towards the roof Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Fi
29. out the year except in extreme climate zones The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development Thus the infor mation stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publication 210 General Maintenance KODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manufac turer We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a SKODA Service Partner The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capacities include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 211 E WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 206 Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the prevailing conditions Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage a If the oil level is above the range A Fig 183 on page 211 do not contin ue to drive Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ga rage CAUTION Do not pour any additives into the engine oil risk of serious damage to the en gine parts Damage which results from such product are excluded from the war ranty i Note Before a long drive we recommend
30. B5E 0105 Fig 108 Air vents at the rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 Warmed unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the setting of the regulator of the heating or the air conditioning system and the atmospheric conditions 102 Using the system The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3 4 Fig 107 and 6 Fig 108 the outlets can be opened and closed individually Changing the air flow direction gt To change the height of the air flow swivel the horizontal fins with the movable adjuster A Fig 107 or Fig 108 upward or downward gt To change the lateral direction of the air flow turn the vertical fins with the movable adjuster A Fig 107 or Fig 108 to the left or right Open close gt Turn the wheel B Fig 107 or Fig 108 upwards or downwards An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air outlet Setting the direction of the air Active air outlet vents 12 4 1 2 4 5 7 3 4 6 4 5 7 3 4 5 6 7 Do not cover the air outlet vents with any objects of any kind Using the cooling system economically First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 The air conditioning system compressor uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will affect the
31. Centre console Button for se lecting the driving mode First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 156 The menu for selecting the driving mode allows you to set the vehicle to one of the three preset driving modes Normal Sportand Eco or to the driving mode Individual which allows individual settings The selected driving mode is called by pressing the symbol button amp Fig 147 accessed and the menu is opened in the Infotainment display More information about setting the driving mode operating instructions for Infotainment chap ter Vehicle settings If a driving mode other than Normal is selected then the amp Fig 147symbol lights up on the button Mode Normal First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 156 The relevant systems are set for a general type of vehicle use This mode is suitable for common everyday use Mode Sport First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 156 This mode is suitable for a sporty driving style Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems Engine drive The accelerator pedal is more responsive to depressing the pedal and the accel eration is more dynamic than in mode Normal The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode S page 121 Steering The power steering is reduced slightly i e the driver needs to e
32. D Fig 90 on the left gt Fold the rear part of the roll up luggage compartment cover in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Replace the side trims of the luggage compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 Fig 89 gt Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position page 95 When stowing both the roof rack and the roll up luggage compartment cover the rear part of the roll up luggage compartment cover should overlap the rear roof rack Fig 90 Before stowing the roof rack pull out the key from the carrier otherwise it could be damaged a The keys to the roof rack can be stowed in the recess C Fig 89 Seats and useful equipment 91 Storage compartment in the luggage compartment Fig 91 Removing stowage compartment and cargo element example of at taching an item of luggage using the cargo element First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 Increasing the size of the boot gt Remove the cover of the storage compartment A in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 91 Securing items of luggage gt The cargo element B part of the cover of the storage compartment in the di rection of the arrow 2 Fig 91 gt Secure the cargo element with Velcro on the floor covering of the luggage com partment The stowage compartment can be located on either of the two sides of the lug gage compartment according to the model
33. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 232 Sealing gt Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 Fig 200 on page 233 several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 clockwise The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 Inflating gt Screw the tyre inflation hose 5 Fig 200 on page 233 of the air compressor firmly onto the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 79 gt Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Max imum run time of 8 minutes M gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre gt Firmly screw the
34. If one of the airbags is deployed the hazard warning light system will switch on automatically When the turn signal is switched on while the hazard warning light system is on ignition on only the turn signal light for the selected driving direction will flash while the turn signal is switched on CAUTION Switch on the hazard warning light system if for example the following occurs a You encounter a traffic congestion a The vehicle has broken down Lights and visibility 57 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 Parking light P switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Place the lever into the position A or where applicable B as far as it can go Fig 30 on page 53 the side light on the right left side of the vehicle is switched on Switching on the side light on both sides gt Turn the light switch A to position Fig 29 on page 52 and lock the vehicle i Note If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light is not automatically switched on a This chapter contains information on the following subjects B5E 0091 Front interior light 58 ee Rear interior light 59 Aig I REET Ts Rear itenior igni First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 Front door warning light 60 Co Entry lighting 60 E Switching on the light gt Press the
35. Multifunction box Octavia Estate B5E 0208 Fig 96 Remove multifunction box B5E 0213 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The multifunction box under the roll up luggage compartment cover is provided for the storage of clothing and light objects with no sharp edges Pulling out gt Fold down the front hooks on both sides of the luggage compart ment page 88 gt Grasp the rear bar A Fig 95 with both hands and pull out the complete box in the direction of the arrow 1 gt Place the rear bar onto the two hooks that are folded forward in the direction of the arrow 2 all the way to the stop Pushing in gt Remove the rear bar from the hook in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 95 gt Push in the complete multifunction box in the direction of the arrow 4 94 Using the system gt Place the rear bar against the front bar and press them together at both ends gt Fold back the front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment Removing inserting gt Remove the roll up luggage compartment cover page 90 gt Remove the multifunction box from the receptacle in the direction of the ar row Fig 96 Insertion takes place in the reverse order gt When inserting push the end of the bar marked R f into the right receptacle and the end of the bar marked TfL into the left receptacle The arrows should be pointing forward Fig 96
36. Normal program mode for driving forward Sport program Switch between the modes by moving the selector lever to the sprung position V Fig 121 if necessary by selecting the driving mode page 156 In mode D or S the forward gears are shifted automatically depending on the en gine load the operation of the accelerator pedal the vehicle speed and the se lected driving mode page 156 If you select the driving mode Sport or Normal and move the selector lever to the position D S the transmission is set automatically to mode S or D In mode S the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher engine speeds than in mode D E Economical driving mode If you select the driving mode Eco page 156 and move the selector lever to the position D S the transmission is set automatically to mode E This mode cannot be selected with the selector lever In mode E the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at lower engine speeds than in mode D Releasing selector lever from mode P or N selector lever lock The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent that the forward driving is selected accidentally thereby setting the vehicle in motion The indicator light page 20 illuminates in the instrument cluster The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while the pressing lock button at the same time Fig 122 The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving
37. a The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors a You should satisfy yourself before reversing that there is no small obstacle such as a rock thin post trailer drawbar etc in front or behind your vehicle Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors a Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of cloth ing cannot reflect the system signals Thus these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system Under adverse conditions this can cause objects or people to not be recognized by the system CAUTION a If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault The fault is also indicated by the Pu symbol flashing in the Fig 130 on page 136 button or A appears in the Infotainment display Have the fault rectified by a specialist ga rage a The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable the system to oper ate properly a The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory set to be higher than for rear obstacle recogni
38. are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION a The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg a Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of damaging the net Folding double hooks Fig 82 Folding double hooks B5E 0077 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The folding double hook is used to affix small items of luggage e g bags The folding double hook can be located on either of the two sides of the luggage compartment according to the model CAUTION An item of luggage with a maximum weight of 5 kg can be attached to each side of the double hook Seats and useful equipment 87 Foldable hooks Octavia Estate J Aa E hooks p B5E 0185 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 Foldable hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provi ded on both sides of the luggage compartment gt Press on the lower portion of the hook A and then fold it in direction of the arrow Fig 83 The front foldable hooks are also used to fasten the rear bar of the multifunction box page 94 CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 kg 88 Using the system Floor covering Fig 84 Fixing the floor covering Octavia Octavia Estate First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The raised floor
39. do no replace tyres individually a Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity of mounted tyres risk of accident Never exceed the maximum permissible speed of mounted tyres risk of ac cident An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling risk of accident 220 General Maintenance HE WARNING Continued a Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately re duce your speed and stop If no external damage is evident drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by KODA for your model of vehicle Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle risk of accident EI WARNING Observe the following information regarding damage and wear of tyres Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age a Never drive with damaged tyres risk of accident Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface par ticularly at high speeds on wet roads One could experience aquaplaning uncontrolled movements of the vehicle swimming on a wet r
40. gt Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time such as at a cross roads Parking gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Press and hold the lock button Fig 122 on page 122 gt Move the selector lever into the position P and then release the lock button Driving in neutral position in mode E freewheel gt Move the selector lever into the position D S gt Select the Eco driving mode page 156 Driving mode 1 This function is only valid for some engines 124 Driving gt Take the foot off the accelerator pedal The vehicle moves without the braking effect of the engine The gear is selected again automatically when you briefly depress the brake ped al or pull the left rocker switch towards the steering wheel page 123 Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic Launch control The launch control function allows the vehicle in mode S or Tiptronic to reach its maximum acceleration when starting off gt Disable the TCS page 132 Brake assist systems gt START STOP deactivate page 155 Manually activating deactivating the sys tem gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot gt Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot gt Release the brake pedal The vehicle starts off with maximum
41. gt TCS system switched off gt Intervention of the driver in the automatic steering procedure stops the steer ing wheel gt Reverse gear disengaged or selector lever removed from the position R when reversing into the parking space gt Selector lever moved to position P gt There is a system fault system temporarily not available gt Automatic braking for damage limitation If any of the above events occurs the following warning message is dis played page 140 Assist systems 139 Manoeuvring out of a parallel parking space First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 137 Manoeuvring out gt Press the symbol button Pe Fig 132 on page 138 once gt Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out of which you wish to manoeuvre gt Engage reverse gear gt As soon as the following is shown in the information cluster display Steering int active Check around veh let go of the steering wheel and the steering is taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully gt Follow the instructions of the system shown in the instrument cluster display As soon as the manoeuvring procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display O Steering interv finished Take over steering Automatic termination The system termina
42. in weight Seats and useful equipment 81 Clothes hook First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors EI WARNING a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags a Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Map pockets on the front seats TOMS Map pockets First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The pockets intended for storage of maps magazines etc are provided on the reverse side of the front seat rests Fig 73 82 Using the system EI warnine Never put heavy items in the map pockets risk of injury CAUTION Never put large objects into the map pockets e g bottles or objects with sharp edges risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings Storage compartment in rear centre console Fig 74 Opening the storage compart ment B5E 0053 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The storage compartment is equ
43. recirculation page 106 aD i Note The warning light in the symbol button A C lights after activation even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are met page 105 By light ing up of the warning light in the button the operational readiness of the cooling system is signalled Heating and air conditioning system 105 adjusting AA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings T7 on page 105 Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes Setting of the control dial Fig 110 on page 105 Button Fig 110 on page 105 Defrost defog windscreen and Desired tempera side windows ture To the right up to Rapid heating the stop Air outlet vents 4 Fig 107 on page 102 window Briefly switch on Automatically switched on Switched off Opening Desired tempera Comfortable heating e Switched off Do not switch on Opening To the leftupto briefly 6 then 2 Rapid cooling the stop 3 Automatically switched Activated a on Opening Desired tempera ture 1 3 Comfortable cooling Activated Do not switch on Opening To the left up to Fresh air mode ventilation the stop Desired position Switched off Do not switch on Opening a We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This can result
44. through bodies of water e g flooded roads gt Determine the depth of the water when driving through bodies of water The water level must fit around the strut on the side member as a maxi mum Fig 127 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into other parts of the vehicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off gt Deactivate the START STOP system before driving through water page 153 EI WARNING a Driving through water mud sludge etc can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance risk of accident a Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply the brakes for the pur pose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy CAUTION a When driving through bodies of water some parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox chassis or electrics can be severely damaged a Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle a Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or im possible to drive
45. 12 2 Permissible trailer load braked kg 11002 1300 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 610 620 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 7714500 5500 175 1400 4000 4 1197 Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s OCTAVIA MG5 196 OCTAVIA MG6 196 OCTAVIA DSG7 196 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG5 193 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG6 193 OCTAVIA ESTATE DSG7 193 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1300 1500 Permissible trailer load un braked kg a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 Technical data 257 1 4 Itr 103 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 103 4500 6000 250 1500 3500 4 1395 OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG7 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE DSG7 Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 15009 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 1 8 Itr 132 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm MG6 DSG6 132 5100 6200 250 1250 5000 DSG6 4x4 132 4500 6200 280 1350 4500 4 1798 OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG7 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG6 ae ee Top speed
46. 126 130 131 132 132 135 137 141 143 149 153 Driving mode ProActive passenger protection Lane Assist Traffic sign recognition Fatigue detection break recommendation Towing a trailer Towing device Trailer Safety Passive Safety General information Correct seated position Seat belts Using seat belts Inertia reel and belt pretensioners Airbag system Description of the airbag system Airbag overview Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Fastening elements General Maintenance Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle Washing your car Taking care of your vehicle exterior Taking care of the interior Modifications repairs and technical alterations Inspecting and replenishing Fuel Engine compartment Engine oil Table of Contents 156 158 158 161 162 164 164 167 171 171 172 175 175 178 180 180 181 185 188 188 191 193 193 194 198 200 204 204 206 210 Coolant 212 Brake fluid gt 2 Vehicle battery 215 Wheels 220 Tyres and wheel rims 220 Winter operation 226 Emergency equipment and self help 227 Emergency equipment 227 Changing a wheel 229 Tyre repair 232 Jump starting 235 Towing the vehicle 236 Remote control 238 Emergency unlocking locking 239 Replacing windscreen
47. 133 gt Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS page 134 gt Driver Steering Recommendation DSR page 134 gt Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA page 134 gt Hill Hold Control HHC page 134 gt Multicollision brake page 135 gt Trailer stabilisation TSA page 168 Driving with a trailer The ESC system cannot be deactivated Only some systems with built in ESC can be deactivated or activated Activate deactivate TCS Within the ESC system the TCS can be activated or deactivated in the Infotain ment Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings key CAR or with the sym bol key 2 Fig 128 gt Briefly press the symbol button amp 8 The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster and the following message is shown on the display Traction control ASR deactivated ASROFF gt Press the symbol button amp again The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster and the following message is shown on the display Traction control TCS activated 6 TCSON Enable disable ESC Sport Within the ESC system the ESC SPORT can be deactivated or activated in the In fotainment Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings key CAR or with the symbol key 2 Fig 128 ESC Sport is a setting intended for a sporty way of driving By activating ESC Sport the TCS is disabled and the activation of the ESC procedure is delayed so that the sporty drive will not
48. 178 Seat belts The physical principle of a head on collision 176 Seat features 71 Seats Armrest front 72 Electric adjustment 68 Folding front passenger seat 72 Head restraints 69 Heating 71 Manually adjusting 68 Rear armrest 72 save 70 Seat backrests 73 Storing in memory of remote control key 70 Seats and useful equipment _ 67 Adjusting the seats 67 see automatic gearbox Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction steering wheel 123 Selecting driving mode 156 Selector lever see Using the selector lever 122 Selector lever lock Warning light 20 Service 201 Service display Y R2 Setting Positions of the variable loading floor 95 Steering wheel 114 Setting the clock 12 Shifting gears Driving and saving energy 127 Side airbag 183 Side lights 52 ski bag 84 Sliding tilting roof Closing the sun screen Octavia Estate 49 Closing Octavia Estate 49 Closing Octavia gt g Opening closing the sun screen Octavia Estate 49 Opening and tilting Octavia Estate 49 Opening and tilting Octavia 47 Operation Octavia Estate 49 Operation Octavia 47 Snow chains 226 Spare wheel 224 Speedometer 10 see speedometer 10 Speed symbol see Wheels 223 Spoiler 201 Sport mode 157 START STOP 153 Manually activating deactivating the system 155 Operating conditions of the system 155 Starting shu
49. 246 Do it yourself First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 243 Replacing fuses gt Press together the interlocks of the cover simultaneously in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 216 gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Replace the appropriate fuse gt Place the cover on top of the fusebox gt Push in the interlocks on the cover and lock Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 243 Power consumer 1 Control unit for ESC 2 Control unit for ESC ABS 3 Engine control unit 4 Engine control unit relay for electric auxiliary heating 5 Engine components 6 Brake sensor engine components 7 Coolant pump engine components 8 Lambda probe 9 Ignition control unit for glow plug system engine components 10 Control unit for fuel pump ignition 1 Electrical auxiliary heating system 12 Electrical auxiliary heating system 13 Control unit for automatic gearbox 14 Windscreen heater left 15 Horn 16 Ignition fuel pump 17 Control unit for ABS ESC engine control unit 18 Data bus control unit 19 Windscreen wipers Power consumer Alarm ABS Engine control unit Starter Electrical auxiliary heating system Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Win
50. 2500 rpm If the filter is properly cleaned the warning icon 4 amp goes out If the filter is not properly cleaned the warning icon does not go out and the warning icon 0 begins to flash The following message is shown in the information cluster display Diesel particulate filter Log book DIESEL PM FILTER OWNER MANUAL Seek help from a specialist garage FJ warninec a The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures Therefore do not park in areas where the hot filter can come into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials there is the risk of fire Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic CAUTION a As long as the warning icon lights up you must take into account an in creased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine a Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce the life of the diesel particle filter A KODA partner will be able to tell you which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content Note a We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys This will improve the com bustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter a f the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after war
51. 9 and keep it pressed down gt Switch on the ignition and keep button 6 pressed down until the following message displays Reset inspection service are you sure RESET SERVICE gt Release and then press again the button 6 CAUTION We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself Incor rectly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehicle Note a Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle bat tery is disconnected a If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display We recommend having this work undertaken by a SKODA service partner a For more information on the service intervals service schedule chapter serv ice intervals Auto check control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked contin uously when the ignition is switched on Error messages and or other information are displayed in the instrument cluster display Some messages are displayed simultaneously with the warning lights page 14 or warning icons in the display page 20 While the operational faults remain unrectified the messages are always indica ted again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols A or continue to be indicat
52. After switching on the ignition some warning icons illuminate briefly as a func tion test If the tested systems are OK the corresponding warning icons go out a few sec onds after switching on the ignition Depending on the meaning of the warning icon the icon A or A will also light up in the bar with the warning lights 5 Fig 2 on page 9 Some warning icons can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in the instrument cluster display The status of some features and systems is shown by the warning lights page 14 Description Warning Danger While the operational faults remain unrectified the messages are always indica ted again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols A or A continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver On vehicles with a colour information display Fig 3 on page 10 D some warn ing icons in the display are in colour EI warnine a Ignoring illuminated warning icons and related messages or instructions in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 57 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescri bed distance observe the national legal provisions when doing so The engine
53. B Attaching the wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen 242 Do it yourself CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel LHD 244 Fuses in the dash panel RHD 244 Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel 245 Fuses in the engine compartment 246 Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment 246 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses Replacing fuses gt Switch off the ignition and the appropriate consumer before changing a fuse gt Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat ing page 245 Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel or page 246 As signment of fuses in the engine compartment gt Take the plastic clip found from beneath the cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment Fig 217 on page 246 insert over the fuse and remove it gt A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been eliminated Colour coding of fuses light brown 5 dark brown 7 5 red 10 blue 15 yellow blue 20 white 25 green
54. Do not sit facing to the side gt Do not lean out of the window 174 Safety gt Do not put your feet out of the window gt Do not put your feet on the dash panel gt Do not put your feet on the seat upholstery gt Do not transport somebody in the footwell gt Do not drive without fastening the seat belt gt Do not remain in the luggage compartment CQ Introduction Fig 160 Driver wearing seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a head on collision 176 Fastening and unfastening seat belts 177 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats 178 Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ac cident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated posi tion Fig 160 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable ex tent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well result in severe injuries The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is as much as possible absorbed by the belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures such as the airbag system also contribute to reducing the kinetic
55. Never engage reverse gear when driving risk of accident CAUTION If not in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mecha nism to wear excessively Pedals Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 121 The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances In the driver s footwell only a footmat which is attached to the two correspond ing attachment points may be used Only use factory supplied foot mats or formats from the range of SKODA Original Accessories which are fitted to two attachment points EJ warnine No objects may be placed in the driver s footwell risk due to obstruction or limitation of pedal operation CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Modes and use of selector lever __ 2 Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic 123 Starting off and driving 124 Malfunction RS Starting off and Driving 121 EI WARNING Do not depress the accelerator if changing the forward driving mode risk of accident a Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving risk of an acci dent a When the vehicle is stationery and the engine is running you need to hold the vehicle with the brake pedal in mode D S or R Even when the engine is idling the power transmission is never completely interrupted the vehicle
56. Paintwork See Paintwork care 195 Paintwork care 195 Park assist 137 Finding a parking space 138 Information messages 140 Parking 139 Parking Automatic brake assist 140 Manoeuvring out of a parallel parking space 140 Park assist 137 Parking aid 135 Parking aid 135 Automatic system activation when moving for ward 137 Function 136 Road display 137 Parking vehicle 38 Part replacement 200 Passive safety Before setting off 171 Driving safety 172 Safety equipment 171 Passive Safety 171 Pedals 121 Floor mats 121 Petrol refer to Fuel 205 Polishing the paintwork See Taking care of your vehicle 195 Power outlet 12 V 79 Power sockets 230 V 83 Power steering 114 Warning light 16 Power windows Button in the front passenger door 46 Index 267 ProActive passenger protection 158 Function 158 Warning light 18 R Radiator fan 209 Radio remote control Auxiliary heating 11 Raise vehicle 231 Rear view mirror Exterior mirrors 66 Rear fog light 56 Warning light 17 Rear interior light 59 Rear mirror 64 Interior mirror 65 Rear window heater 60 Recirculated air mode Climatronic 109 Manual air conditioning 106 Recommended gear 26 Refuelling 204 Fuel 204 Remote control Replacing the battery 238 Synchronisation process 239 Remote Control lock 34 unlock 34 Remote control key Replacing the battery 238 Removable ski bag 84 Repairs and t
57. T Fuel supply 1 Distance driven 12 264 Index Door Child safety lock 37 Closing 37 Emergency locking the driver s door 240 Opening 37 Door locking Emergency 240 Doors Emergency locking 240 Door warning 26 double hooks 87 Driver Steer Recommendation DSR 134 Driving Abroad 131 Driving through water on streets 130 Emissions 254 Fuel consumption 254 Driving mode 156 Driving through water 130 DSR 134 3 Eco mode 157 Economical driving 126 Ballast 128 Driving at full throttle 127 Idling 127 Looking ahead 126 Regular maintenance 129 Short distances 128 Tyre inflation pressure 128 Economic driving Looking ahead 127 Eco tips 26 EDL 134 Electrical power windows 46 Button in the driver s door 44 45 Button in the rear doors 46 Operational faults 47 Electric luggage compartment lid Acoustic signals 43 Adjusting the top lid position 44 Deleting the top lid position 44 Force limiter 4 Malfunctions 44 4 manual operation Operating 42 Electronic Differential Lock EDL Electronic immobiliser Electronic Stability Control ESC Emergency Automatic gearbox Changing a wheel Door locking Hazard warning light system Jump starting Locking the driver s door Start engine KESSY Switching off the ignition KESSY Towing the using the tow hitch Towing the vehicle Tyre repair Unlock
58. The mode is active if none of the following modes are active City mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that it illuminates the adja cent pavement crossings etc The mode is active at speeds of 15 50 km h Motorway mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can respond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time The mode is active at speeds above 110 km h Rain mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can reduce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain 54 Using the system The mode is active at speeds of 50 90 km h and if the windscreen wipers con tinuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes The mode is deacti vated when the windscreen wipers are switched off for longer than 8 minutes Fog mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver is not daz zled by the reflection of the cone of light by fog in front of the vehicle The mode is active at speeds of 15 70 km h and if the rear fog light is switched on for a period of time longer than 10 seconds The mode is deactivated when the rear fig light is switched off for longer than 5 seconds Dynamic cornering lights The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so that the road in the curve is illuminated This function is active at speeds greater than 10 km h and in all AFS modes Tourist light
59. The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 188 The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times Wheels 221 Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres With greater payload adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced When driving there are a wide range of influences which may result in an imbalance This may become apparent by a vibration in the steering Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres Wheel alignment errors An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the tyres Tyre damage Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and perpendicularly wherever possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies e g small stones from the tyre profile immediately Changing wheels around If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend chang ing the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the dia gram Fig 189 You will then obtain approximately the same life for all
60. This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When the tourist light mode is active the above mentioned modes and the side swivel of the headlights is deactivated The Tourist light mode can be configured in the Infotainment operating in structions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button EI warnine If the AFS system is defective the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle Drive carefully and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible Note If the Eco driving mode is selected the AFS system is deactivated page 156 Headlight assist TOSE Operating lever Headlight assist RES O CANCEL GFF A ODA a D NA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 The Headlight assist switches the headlights on off automatically depending on the environmental conditions The headlight is regulated based on data gathered by the camera attached be tween the windscreen and interior mirror The function of Headlight assist can be activated deactivated in the Infotain ment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button The headlight can switch off automatically at speeds above 60 k
61. Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting that illuminate the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel These are switched on auto matically when the parking light is activated Also after switching on the ignition when the parking lights are switched on the door handle lighting comes on a Fig 38 Interior lights at the rear Col First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 Switching on gt Press the cover glass on the icon Fig 38 Switching off gt Press the cover glass on the icon O Operating with the door contact switch gt Place the cover glass in the middle position In this position the same rules apply to this light as for the front interior light page 58 Fig 37 Interior light without reading lights interior light with reading lights Lights and visibility 59 Front door warning light Fig 3E Warning light Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 The warning light is located in the lower door trim panel Fig 39 The light switches on off when the front door is opened or closed Vehicles without this warning light have only a reflector at this point i Note If the door is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 10 minutes Entry lighting Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 The lighting is positi
62. a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked Loosening tightening wheel bolts Fig 196 Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts lt B5E 0123 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 229 Loosening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of the arrow Fig 196 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar row Fig 196 until it is tight E WARNING Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn as long as the vehicle has not yet been jacked up Otherwise the wheel could come off and fall down risk of injury i Note If it proves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foot Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make sure you keep your footing 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 232 Raising the vehicle Fig 197 Jacking points for positioning lifting jack Fig 198 Attach lifting jack First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 229 Position the car jack below the jacking point that is closest to the faulty wheel Fig 197 The jacking point is located di
63. across the position N e g from R to D S This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck e g ina bank of snow The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever is in the posi tion N for more than approx 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds up to 5 km h If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D S or vice versa move the selector lever quickly This prevents that you accidentally select mode R or N Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic Fig 123 Selector lever and multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lever or multifunction steering wheel This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving The currently selected gear is indicated in the display of the instrument cluster 1 Fig 121 on page 122 The gear recommendation must be observed when changing gear page 26 Switching to manual shifting gt Push the selector lever to the right out of position D S Shifting up gears gt Press the selector lever forwards Fig 123 gt Pull the right rocker switch Fig 123 briefly towards the steering wheel Shifting down gears gt Press the selector lever backwards Fig 123 gt Pull the left rock
64. again gt Within 10 seconds press the lever in position 4 and keep it held for around 2 seconds Fig 43 on page 63 The windscreen wiper arms move into the service position Removing the wiper blade gt Raise the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen Fig 211 gt Tilt the wiper blade as far as it can go in the direction of the windscreen wiper arm arrow A gt Hold the upper part of the windscreen wiper arm and unlock the securing mech anism 1 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow B Attaching the wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached Emergency equipment and self help 241 gt Fold the wiper arms back to the windscreen gt Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position 4 Fig 43 on page 63 The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position Replacing the rear window wiper blade Fig 212 Rear window wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 Removing the wiper blade gt Raise the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen Fig 212 gt Tilt the wiper blade as far as it can go in the direction of the windscreen wiper arm arrow A gt Hold Te part of the windscreen wiper arm and unlock the securing mech anism 1 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
65. apply the brake 146 Driving Operation Overview TOMES Operating lever DISTANCE S OFF 4 E SPEED CANCEL amp THe AS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 Overview of ACC functions operated with the lever 1 OFF Deactivate ACC 2 ON Activate ACC control deactivated 3 SET Start control adopt current speed Reduce speed by 1 km h at a time 4 DISTANCE Set proximity level 5 CANCEL Stop control sprung position 6 RESUME Start control resume increase speed by 1 km h at a time sprung position SPEED Increase speed by 10 km h at a time SPEED Decrease speed by 10 km h at a time Note If the lever Fig 139 is pushed straight OFF straight into the sprung position RESUME the current speed will be stored and control starts Start control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 Control can be started with the button SET or by pushing the lever into the sprung position RESUME Fig 139 on page 146 Button SET gt Press the button SET The ACC will take over the current speed and executes control Lever position RESUME gt Push the lever into the sprung position RESUME The ACC will take over the current speed and executes control Should the speed be stored already the ACC adopts this speed and executes control Basic requirements for start of control Y Y ACCis en
66. be able to be opened from the inside The system is fitted with a force limiter page 46 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centi metres The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully risk of injury a It is recommended to deactivate the electrical power windows in the rear doors safety pushbutton S Fig 24 on page 45 when children are being transported on the rear seats CAUTION Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric win dows a In the event that the windows are frozen first of all eliminate the ice page 196 De icing windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the electrical power windows Otherwise the window sealing and the electrical pow er window mechanism could be damaged a In the winter ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause there to be more resistance when closing the window The window will stop and move back several centimetres a It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window page 46 a When leaving the locked vehicle make sure that the windows are closed at all times SA For the sake of the environment At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption Note The window lift system is equipped with protection against overheating Repea ted opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to
67. be compromised if applicable Q gt Press and hold the symbol button amp A The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster and the following message is shown on the display O ESC Sport Limited driving stability ESCSPORT gt Press the symbol button amp again a The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster and the following message is shown on the display Electronic Stability Control ESC activated ESCON CAUTION By activating ESC Sport TCS is automatically deactivated As a result of this some of the other vehicle system functions may be limited Antilock Braking System ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thus helping the driver to main tain control of the vehicle The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises When the ABS system is active do not brake periodically or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Traction Control System TCS Fig 129 TCS button B5E 0150 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 If the wheels are slipping the TCS system adapts the engine speed to the condi tions of the road surface The TCS makes it much easier to start off accelerate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road s
68. case the Assist system is not ready to intervene Place your hands on the steer ing wheel CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 161 Notifications and settings 162 Information messages Ci EJ WARNING a Traffic sign detection only operates as a support Real traffic signs always have priority over electronic displays The driver is always responsible for cor rectly assessing the traffic situation Traffic signs may not be recognised at all by the system or may be recog nised incorrectly As a result the traffic signs may not be displayed at all or the wrong one may appear a Traffic sign recognition does not warn about exceeding the maximum per mitted speed nor does it adjust the driving speed to the maximum speed a The display notification is based on the standard units of speed measure ment in the country For example the notification in the display of the in strument cluster can therefore be shown in km h or mph depending on the country Note Traffic sign recognition is not available in all countries Function Fig 151 Windscreen Camera viewing range for traffic sign recognition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 161 Traffic sign recognition From here on referred to only as system allows the fol lowing traffic signs recognised by the system to be shown in the instrument clus ter d
69. compartment CAUTION Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the follow ing a heating elements in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear side windows Octavia Estate m Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 221 Service life of tyres Fastening elements Fig 78 Fastening elements Octavia B5E 0076 1 The upper front lashing eye is located underneath the folding rear seat backrest 86 Using the system B5E 0184 Fig 79 Fastening elements Octavia Estate Equipment without variable loading floor equipment with variable loading floor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The luggage compartment comprises the following fastening elements Fig 78 or Fig 79 A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets Fastening elements and loops only for fastening fixing nets CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes A is 3 5 kN 350 kg Fixing nets B5E 0111 Fig 81 Fastening vertical pocket B5E 0229 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 Examples for attaching the fixing nets Fig 80 A Horizontal pocket Floor net Vertical pocket FJ warnine Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy objects
70. compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 206 Engine compartment Q Rear seat belt warning First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 QO Arear seat belt is not fastened 4 Arear seat belt is fastened The warning icons or 4 come on after the ignition has been switched on When the seat belt is fastened unfastened the particular icon lights up briefly and indicates the current belt status Further information page 175 Seat belts Alternator First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 The warning icon 4 lights up if the vehicle battery is not charged when the en gine is running Seek help from a specialist garage CAUTION If the icon cooling system fault comes on in addition to the icon amp when driv ing stop the vehicle immediately and switch off the engine risk of engine dam age Coolant First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 Coolant level too low If the coolant level is too low the warning icon lights up and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK Log book ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK gt Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the coolant level page 213 gt If the co
71. covering of the luggage compartment can be fixed e g when handling the spare wheel gt Octavia With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cover Fig 84 AJ gt Octavia Estate With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment lid Fig 84 B CAUTION The floor covering can be fixed in the Octavia Estate only if the variable loading floor is folded in the upper position Fig 100 on page 96 Double sided floor covering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 You can fit a double sided floor covering in the luggage compartment One side of the double sided floor covering is made of fabric the other side is washable easy to maintain The washable side is used to transport wet or dirty items CAUTION The double sided floor covering can only be used in vehicles without the variable loading floor page 94 There is a risk of damage to the variable loading floor Note For easier turning of the covering use the loop attached Luggage net Fig 85 Luggage net W B5E 0048 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The luggage net is located on the underside of the luggage compartment cover The net is designed for transporting lighter objects FJ waRNiNG Only store soft objects with a total weight of 1 5 kg in the net Heavy objects are not secured suffici
72. creeps CAUTION a f you moved the selector lever to mode N while driving you need to release the accelerator pedal and wait until the engine has reached its idling speed before you can move the selector lever to a forward driving mode again a At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in the selector lev er position P a When trying to stop on a slope never try to hold the vehicle using the accelera tor pedal this may lead to gear damage Modes and use of selector lever Fig 121 Selector lever Instrument cluster display 122 Driving Fig 122 Shiftlock button tai B5E 0217 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 When the ignition is switched on the gearbox mode and the currently selected gear are indicated in the display of the instrument cluster 1 Fig 121 The following modes can be selected with the selector lever Fig 121 P Parking mode The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode The parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary R Reverse gear Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idling speed Before selecting the mode R from mode P or N depress the brake pedal and at the same time press the Shiftlock Fig 122 N Neutral The power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode D S mode for driving forward
73. electric lid EI warnine a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the luggage compart ment lid Otherwise the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if it was locked risk of accident Never drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poi soning CAUTION The movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick force against the lid a Do not try to close the lid manually during the electrical closing process Dam age can occur to the system of the electric boot lid a f the lid is closed manually it must be ensured that when moving the lid into the lock pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the SKODA logo CAUTION Before opening or closing the lid check if there are any objects in the opening or closing range which could obstruct the movement e g a load on the roof rack or on the trailer etc risk of causing damage to the lid a Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened lid e g dis tance from the garage ceiling Otherwise it may happen that the clearance above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load e g after unloading risk of causing damage to the lid a In certain circumstances if the lid is loaded e g by a thick layer of snow the opening process of the lid can be interrupted Remo
74. energy in the best possible way The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the ve hicle page 188 EJ warnine a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the people seated at the rear risk of injury a Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 177 Fastening and unfastening seat belts The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated page 172 Correct seated position The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness EJ warnine Observe the following instructions to ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed a Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then sud denly held firm by the belt The belt w
75. engine compartment injuries scolding accident or fire hazards may arise For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area EJ warnine Before beginning work in the engine compartment please read the following advice Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key a Firmly apply the handbrake a f the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever into Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the selec tor lever into position P a Allow the engine to cool Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping FJ warnine While working in the engine compartment please read the following advice Keep children clear of the engine compartment a Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns a The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health a Avoid contact with the coolant Coolant vapours are harmful to health a Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the en gine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansio
76. for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are fastened too tightly it can cause damage to the anti theft wheel bolt and adapter Note a The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Part ner a The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preparation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 229 Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel Emergency equipment and self help 229 gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine gt Move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the auto matic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt If a trailer is connected remove it gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 228 and the spare wheel page 224 from the luggage compartment Changing a wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 229 gt Remove the full wheel trim page 225 or caps page 225 gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts page 231 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the
77. for switching on the auxiliary heating parking heating and ventila tion hereinafter referred to only as auxiliary heating V The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient V Aset time is activated in the Infotainment Infotainment manual chap ter Vehicle settings JV The fuel supply is adequate the warning icon R is not lit in the display of the instrument cluster v The blower is switched on JV The air outlet vents are open J The air outlet is set to position amp or 3 Auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by switching off the engine whereby the interior temperature is effectively de creased e g with the vehicle parked in the sun Auxiliary heating parking heating The auxiliary heating parking heating can be used when stationary when the engine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and while driving e g during the heating phase of the engine 110 Using the system The auxiliary heater parking heater functions in connection with the air condi tioning system or Climatronic The auxiliary heating parking heating also warms up the engine The auxiliary heating parking heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehicle tank The coolant warms up the air which flows into the passen ger compartment if the blower speed is not set to zero F WARNING a The auxiliary heater independent vehicle heater must never
78. front doors For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels e g additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage The following instructions must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the re sulting openings have not been properly sealed a Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed a Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loud speakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door pan els a Always have work carried out by a KODA service partner or an experienced specialist garage CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Deactivating airbags 185 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 186 Deactivating airbags Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 185 Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones outlined below gt If using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat due to different le gal regulations the airbag must be deactivated if using a forward facing child seat in some countries page 188
79. gt With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer s user manual of the child seat EJ wARNING a It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat page 185 Deactivating airbags a Never use a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passen ger airbag is activated This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed a This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found in one of the follow ing locations On the B column on the front passenger side Fig 172 a The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger door On the front passenger s sun visor In some countries the sticker is located on the passenger s sun visor Fig 172 B a With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make
80. have not been properly sealed Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loud Head airbags speakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door pan ae els Fig 170 Location of the head airbag gas filled head airbag a Always have work carried out by a SKODA service partner or an experienced specialist garage Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 181 In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car Fig 170 A 184 Safety In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the rele vant side airbag and the front seat belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the accident occurs When deployed the airbag covers the windows of the front and rear doors as well as the door pillar Fig 170 B Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car is cushioned by the inflated head airbag The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area The head airbag a
81. inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e g ice snow or leaves to ensure that the auxiliary heating and cooling system operates properly Switching on off Fig 112 Button for switching on off the system directly on the operating part of the air conditioning Climatronic First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 110 The auxiliary heating parking heating can be switched on off as follows Manually switching on using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning Clima tronic The warning light in the button lights up Fig 112 ON by using the radio remote control page 111 Manually switching off using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning Clima tronic The warning light in the button goes out Fig 112 OFF by using the radio remote control page 111 After switching the system off the auxiliary heating will continue running a little while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in the auxiliary heater After switching off the auxiliary heating the coolant pump runs for a short period Switching on automatically The auxiliary heater is switched on according to the Infotainment settings Info tainment manual chapter Vehicle settings When automatic switching on is activated the indicator light in the symbol button lights up for about 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off Switching off automatically
82. is automatically set back to zero if this period is exceeded Driving time The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased appears in the display If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time on at this moment reset the memory by setting the button to zero page 30 The maximum distance indicated is 99 hours and 59 minutes The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Convenience consumers The consumption display for the convenience consumers in I h Together with the consumption display a list of three convenience consumers with the highest consumption is also displayed Information system 29 Select information BSE 0155 Fig 10 Buttons adjustment wheel on the operating lever multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 28 Selecting using the operating lever gt Briefly press the rocker switch A Fig 10 up or down Selecting using the multifunction steering wheel gt Turn the adjustment wheel D Fig 10 upwards or downwards Memory First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 28 The multifunction display is equipped with three automatic memories Select memory gt Press the button B or the adjustment wheel D Fig 10 on page 30 briefly Resetting gt Select the desired memory gt Press longer on the button
83. is located in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column Fig 167 In the event of a severe frontal collision the driver s knee airbag and front airbags are deployed The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced First read and observe the introductory information given on page 181 FJ WARNING Adjust the driver s seat in a forward back direction so that there is a gap of In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides additional at least 10 cm between the legs B and the dash panel in the vicinity of the protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the ve knee airbag Fig 167 If it is not possible to meet this requirement due to your hicle body size visit a specialist garage The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column not have stickers attached be covered or modified in any other way This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat back been moistened with water No objects must be attached to the cover of the rest Fig 168 B airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects bunch of keys etc to the igni tion key These can be ejected by the
84. is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle a Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch the ignition on or off and before starting the engine to avoid damage from voltage fluctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices Multimedia holder Fig 68 Multimedia holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 A The multimedia holder is located in the front centre console Fig 68 You can use this holder to store e g a mobile phone MP3 player or similar devi ces FJ waRNiNG Never use the holder as an ashtray or for storing flammable objects risk of fire Seats and useful equipment 79 Storage compartment under the front armrest Fig 69 Opening the storage compart ment B5E 0228 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Opening gt Pull and open the cover of the armrest using the handle A in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 69 Closing gt Open the lid to the stop only then can it be folded downwards and against the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 69 The area B Fig 69 of the stowage compartment is designed for the storage of objects w
85. just water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Checking the brake fluid level 214 Changing 215 214 General Maintenance EI warnine The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 206 a f the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking do not continue your journey risk of accident Seek help from a specialist garage Do not use used brake fluid the function of the brake system may be im paired risk of accident CAUTION Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle i Note The brake fluid is changed as part of a prescribed inspection services Checking the brake fluid level Fig 185 Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 185 The level must be between the MIN and MAX markings A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear and tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads There may be an indication of a leak in the bra
86. lever is in the position P N or R Vehicles fitted with an automatic transmission a The Cruise Control System may automatically switch off when some brake as sist systems e g ESC intervene when the speed exceeds maximum permissible engine speed or a similar event takes place a The Cruise Control System also remains activated after shifting the gear Activating deactivating Fig 134 Operating lever Rocker switch and switch of the cruise control system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 Activating gt Turn the switch A Fig 134 into the ON position Deactivating gt Turn the switch A Fig 134 into the OFF position Storing and maintaining speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 gt Activate the cruise control system page 142 gt Drive at the desired speed gt Press the rocker button B in position SET Fig 134 on page 142 After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator 142 Driving Changing the stored speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Press the rocker button B in position RES Fig 134 on page 142 The speed will increase continuous
87. locking the vehicle or turning off the ignition and opening the driver s or front passenger s door The panoramic sliding tilting roof abbreviated in the following as sliding tilting roof can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is higher than 20 C The sliding tilting roof can still be operated for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as the driver or front passenger s door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof LI CAUTION a Always close the sliding tilting roof before disconnecting the battery a If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the sliding tilting roof does not operate correctly Next move the rotary switch into position A Fig 26 on page 47 pull it and hold onto the recess downwards and forwards tightly The sliding tilting roof opens and closes again after around 10 seconds Do not release the control dial until it has done so Fig 26 Control dial for the sliding tilting roof First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 47 Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 26 When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Unlocking and opening 47 Open partially gt Turn the switch to a position in area D Open fully gt Turn the
88. now 6 INSPEC TION NOW or Oil change and inspection now OIL CHAN_ AND INSPECTION NOW Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the button 6 Fig 2 on page 9 and keep it pressed down until Service appears gt Release the button 6 The icon appears in the display as well as the following message for example Service in km or days SERVICE IN km OR DAYS Resetting Service Interval Display If the variable service interval is set in your vehicle and if the service interval dis play is reset the variable service interval is switched to the fixed service interval We therefore recommend that the Service Interval Display be reset only by a spe cialist garage which will reset the display with a vehicle diagnostic tester Reset oil change service gt Switch off the ignition for vehicles with the KESSY system all doors as well as the luggage compartment and bonnet flaps must also be shut gt Press the button 6 Fig 2 on page 9 and keep it pressed down gt Switch on the ignition the following message displays O Reset oil change service RESET OIL SERVICE gt Release and then press again the button 6 Reset Inspection gt Switch off the ignition for vehicles with the KESSY system all doors as well as the luggage compartment and bonnet flaps must also be shut gt Press the button 6 Fig 2 on page
89. observe the introductory information given on page 227 The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the storage space for the spare wheel There is also space here for the removable ball rod for the trailer towing device The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel The components of the vehicle tool kit if included in the vehicle Fig 195 Screwdriver Key for removing and installing the tail light Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts Towing eye Clamps for removing the wheel trims Car jack Crank for the jack Wheel wrench Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps Replacement bulb set Eel el Eee Screw the jack back into its home position after use to allow you to store it in the box with the toolkit EJ warninec The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads risk of injury a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the luggage compart ment a Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preparation 229 Changing a wheel 230 Follow up tasks 230 Loosening tightening wheel bolts 231 Raising the vehicle 231 Securing wheels against theft 232 FI WwARNING a If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set
90. of all control lamps for quick review SKODA Manual App Know your vehicle The SKODA Manual application aims on users of tablet PCs who are interested in SKODA vehicles or already own one The application contains full featured digital version of the Owner s Manual for all current SKODA models Navigation through the list of content gt Classical reading page by page gt Full text search throughout the whole manual gt Bookmarks for fast access to favourite chapters Available to download from AppStore for iOS and Google Play for Android Minimisation of fuel consumption and CO emissions Recyclability Start stop system All models currently in production homologised Recovery in conformity with the requirements for recyclability Indication of recommended gear EU Directive 2005 64 EC Use of recyclable environmentally friendly materials Weight reduction Use of recycled materials with the parameters of the Optimisation of high strength panels reduction new material peremen of thickness in panels and other materials Labelling of materials for the purpose of making sorting easy Replacement of spare wheel with tyre repair kit Reduction of energy consumption Use of energy saving electromechanical steering instead of hydraulic type Optimisation of efficiency of generators Optimisation of operating consumption and electrical current consumption Optimisation of aerodynamic and rolli
91. of the instrument cluster Examples of sys tem indications 160 Driving Fig 150 Colour display of the instrument cluster Examples of system indi cations First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 Explanation of graphic A The system is active but not ready to intervene The system is active and ready to intervene The system intervenes when approaching the right hand boundary lane D Adaptive lane assist ensues boundary lines on both sides of the vehicle de tected Warning lights in the instrument cluster Illuminates Description VEAN The system is active but not ready to intervene E F The system is active and ready to intervene or is currently i intervening Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Lane Assist not available No sensor view The windscreen is dirty iced over or misted up in the camera viewing range Clean the windscreen or remove the obstacles Lane Assist currently not available The system has limited functionality due to a temporary error Try to re activate the machine Error Lane Assist A system error is present Seek help from a specialist garage Lane Assist take over steering The system has detected that there are no hands on the steering wheel In this
92. or pressing the button CANCEL on the operating lever Fig 139 on page 146 Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side are not detected by the radar sensor until they are within the sensor s range Fig 140 B This is especially true for narrow vehicles such as motorcycles If necessary Slow down the car by applying the brake Other vehicles changing lanes Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small proximity Fig 141 do not have to be detected by the radar sensor in time The result may be a delayed ACC response If necessary Slow down the car by applying the brake Stationary vehicles The ACC does not detect stationary objects When a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehi cle Fig 141 Dithe ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle In such cases take over the steering and apply the brake When overtaking When your vehicle is being controlled the speed is lower than that which is stor ed and the indicator is activated the ACC interprets that the driver intends to overtake The ACC automatically accelerates the vehicle thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead If the vehicle changes to the fast lane and no vehicle is detected ahead the ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it constant An acc
93. or other fluids on the ground Note We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA serv ice partner D Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements Environmental compatibility First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 Environmental protection has played a major role in the design selection of mate rials and manufacture of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2 gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable material gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer gt The use of solvent free adhesives gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury gt Use of water soluble paints Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA
94. or the inclination of the vehicle and then triggers the alarm Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the driver door gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 19 on the B pillar on the driver s side The lighting of the symbol in the button changes from red to orange gt Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically after the vehicle is locked Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibility of the alarm being triggered by movements from e g children or animals within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by train or ship or towed CAUTION a The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in terior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle a The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the safe securing system is deactivated The interior monitor is however not activa ted 40 Using the system CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening Closing SS A Automatic locking 41 E WARNING a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the luggage compart ment lid Otherwise the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if it was locked risk of
95. pink 30 Colour Maximum amperage orange green 40 red 50 FJ waRNING Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 206 a Never repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher am perage risk of fire A different electrical system could be damaged CAUTION a If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time have the electrical sys tem checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied correctly Water may get into the fuse box if the cover is not replaced properly there is a risk of damage to the vehicle w Note We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of re placement fuses can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse There can be several consumer devices for one fuse depending on the vehicle s equipment a Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device a Multiple power consuming devices can share a single fuse Fuses and light bulbs 243 Fuses in the dash panel LHD Figs213 Storage compartment on the driver s side LHD y First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 243 On left hand drive vehicles the fuse box is located behind the storage compart ment in the left hand section o
96. seat cushion of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place Fig 174 First remove the caps to access the locking eyes After removing the child seat replace he caps FI warnine a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system a Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the locking eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system risk of death i Note A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle with the help of the ISOFIX system if the child seat in question has been approved for this type of vehicle Further information is available from a SKODA Partner a Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from KODA Original Ac cessories Size category b of the child seat Front passenger seat Rear seats outside Rear seat middle 0 up to 10 kg E X IL SU X 0 E up to 13 kg X IL SU x Transporting children safely 191 Pen ieee Front passenger seat Rear seats outside Rear seat middle IL SU IUF a The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat b Ifthe front passenger seat is fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system this suits installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi Universal approval IL SU The seat is suited f
97. tear when towing in or tow starting Rear towing eye Fig 204 Rear bumper Removing the cap installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 236 Removing installing the cap gt Press on the cap in the area A Fig 204 gt Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 gt After screwing out the towing eye thread the area B of the cap under the up per hand side of the bore in the rear bumper Afterwards press onto the lower side of the cap The cap must engage firmly Removing installing the towing eye gt Manually screw in the towing eye in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 204 until it stops Emergency equipment and self help 237 For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt Unscrew the towing eye against the direction of the arrow 2 On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap page 238 Vehicles with a tow hitch CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Vehicles with a tow hitch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 236 On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount
98. that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle a We recommend that you use oils from KODA Original Accessories a f your skin has come into contact with oil it must be washed thoroughly Specifications and capacity First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with flexible service intervals Petrol engines Specification 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI 1 4 Itr 103 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 132 kW TSI VW 504 00 Diesel engines Specification 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI 2 0 Itr 110 kW TDI VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF Capacity in li tres Capacity in li tres 4 6 Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with fixed service intervals Petrol engines Specification 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI 1 4 Itr 103 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 132 kW TSI VW 502 00 Diesel engines Specification 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI 2 0 Itr 110 kW TDI VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF Capacity in li tres Capacity in li tres 4 6 CAUTION a If the above engine oils are not available a different engine oil can be used in an emergency To prevent damage to the engine a max 0 5 only of the foll
99. the environment ment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from attached to Hem These objects might result iminjuries to the occupants ir the head airbag is deployed m mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel econ omy page 128 Convenience consumers fi Note f the on board voltage drops the windscreen and rear window heater switches off automatically to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine con trol page 219 Automatic load deactivation a If the light within or below the button flashes the radiator will not work be cause of the low state of the battery a Fig 42 Sun screen Col First read and observe the introductory information given on page 60 The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover Pulling out gt Grab the handle B Fig 42 gt Remove the sun screen and hang it from the brackets A Folding Fig 41 Sun visor left right gt Grab the handle B Fig 42 gt Remove the sun screen from the brackets A and slowly roll it up again into the Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 60 housing on the luggage compartment cover a The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of the arrow 1 Fi
100. the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes nec essary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is de ployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi tion Seats and useful equipment 67 i Note a After a certain time play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle a For safety reasons it is not possible to store the seated position in the seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the seat back rest is more than 102 in relation to the seat cushion a Each new driver seat and external mirror position that is saved will overwrite the existing setting Manually adjusting the front seats Fig 48 Control elements Settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 67 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Pull the lever A Fig 48 in the direction of the arrow 1 and push the seat in the required direction The lock must click into place after you release the lever Adjusting height of seat gt Again push pull the lever B Fig 48 in the direction of one of the arrows 2 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Relieve any pressure from the seat backrest do not lean on it and turn the handwheel C Fig 48in the direction of one of the arrows 3 Adjusting lumbar support gt Push the lever D Fig 48 in the
101. the tyres We recommend that you change the tyres around every 10000 km in order to achieve even wear on all tyres and to obtain optimal tyre life Storing tyres Mark them previously used tyres so that you are able to fit them on again to run in the same direction Always store wheels or tyres in a cool dry and where possible dark place Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1 6 mm high wear indicators installed These wear indicators are located multiple times depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre Fig 188 A Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other sym bols identify the position of the wear indicators 222 General Maintenance Tyre age Tyres age losing their original characteristics even if they are not used There fore we recommend not to use summer or winter tyres that are older than 6 years or 4 years respectively New tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 Only fit radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and the same tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels The tyre wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents Where possible replace tyres by axle Always fit the tyres with the deeper tre
102. tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught CAUTION a Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 235 Jump starting a f the gearbox no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer a The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a simi larly elastic material a While towing take care to avoid impermissibly high tensile forces or jerky loads There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road a Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes page 237 Front tow ing eye or page 237 Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the tow ing device page 164 a The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle i Note a We recommend using a tow rop
103. up to an outside temperature of 35 C Adjusting both mirrors in sync gt Set the rotary dial into position L or on right hand drive vehicles into position R Fig 47 The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob The synchronous setting of both mirrors can be activated deactivated in the Info tainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Adjusting the front passenger s mirror gt Set the rotary dial into position R or on right hand drive vehicles into position L Fig 47 The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob Switching off operating control gt Set the rotary knob into the position 0 Fig 47 Folding in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob gt Set the rotary knob into the position amp Fig 47 It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on and at a speed of up to 50 km h 66 Using the system The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position to a different one Folding in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key gt Press and hold the amp symbol button on the remote control key Folding in requires that all electrical power windows are working page 47 Op erational faults The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ign
104. vehicle battery from the electrical system Do not smoke a Never work near open flames a Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby F WARNING a Read the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers a Keep fluids in their original containers and keep out of reach of children a If you wish to work under the vehicle you must secure the vehicle from roll ing away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not sufficient for this risk of injury Inspecting and replenishing 207 HE WARNING Continued Never cover the engine with additional insulation material e g with a blan ket risk of fire The bonnet must always be properly closed when driving This is why after closing the bonnet the lock must always be checked to ensure it has engaged properly If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the ve hicle immediately and close the bonnet risk of accident CAUTION a Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage a Never open the bonnet using the locking lever Fig 179 on page 208 SA For the sake of the environment In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids and the specials tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that flu ids be changed by a specialist garage as part of an inspection service i No
105. vehicle has been un locked If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 45 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally The seat and mirror are adjusted after the vehicle is unlocked page 70 Locking The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been locked If the doors or the luggage compartment lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed The current position of the seat and mirror after the vehicle is locked page 70 Checking the battery condition The battery is empty if the red warning icon B Fig 14 does not flash when you press a button on the remote control key Replace the battery page 238 34 Using the system EI warnine If the car is locked from the outside and the safelock system is switched on there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to open ei ther a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more diffi cult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk of death CAUTION a Only operate the remote control when the doors and luggage compartment lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked us
106. warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below 120 km h D This function only applies to certain countries 10 Using the system Coolant temperature gauge Fig 4 Coolant temperature gauge B5E 0182 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 The coolant temperate display Fig 4 only operates when the ignition is switch ed on Cold range If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads This prevents possible damage to the engine The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid range of the scale At very high ambient temperatures or heavy en gine loads the pointer may move even further to the right High temperature range If the pointer reaches the red area of the scale the coolant temperature is too high Further information page 21 CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet im pair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Fuel gauge Fig 5 Fuel gauge B5E 0183 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 The fuel gauge Fig 5 only operates if the ignition is switched
107. which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with your hands is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 km h to 50 km h the forces that your body is exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric ton 1000 kg For example a person s weight of 80 kg increases at 50 km h to 4 8 tons 4800 kg In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a Seat belt are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car such as steering wheel dash panel or windscreen Fig 161 A In certain circum stances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front Fig 161 Fastening and unfastening seat belts BNH 0111
108. while pressing the lock button The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied provided the ignition is on A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand brake applied The following message is shown in the information cluster display Release the parking brake PARKING BRAKE ON PLEASE RELEASE The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than around 5 km h for more than 3 seconds EI WARNING Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating This can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system risk of accident CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manual gear changing 2 Pedals 121 Manual gear changing Fig 120 Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or 6 gear manual gearbox Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 121 Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down This prevents uneven wear on the clutch Observe the recommended gear page 26 Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the igni tion is on F warnine
109. 02 G Switch the rear window heater on off page 60 lt Open close the fresh air supply recirculation page 104 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 103 This chapter contains information on the following subjects The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting up Control elements 103 Adjusting CS Recirculated air mode 104m Heating and air conditioning system 103 Adjusting Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 103 Recommended basic settings of the heating controls for the respective operating modes Setting of the control dial Fig 109 on page 103 Air outlet vents 4 Fig 107 on a Button amp page 102 Defrosting the windscreen and side To the right up to the windows stop Open and align with the side win Do not switch on 4 ow Free windscreen and side windows j Desired temperature from mist Open and align with the side win Do not switch on d ow To the right up to the Rapid heating stop Briefly switch on Opening Comfortable heating Desired temperature Do not switch on Opening To the left up to the Fresh air mode ventilation stop a Warmer air is directed to the footwell than to the upper part of the body We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 107 on page 102 in the open position in all operating modes Recirculated air m
110. 3 Tools 228 TOP TETHER 192 Towing 236 Towing a trailer 164 Towing device Description 164 Drawbar load 164 Use and care 167 Towing eye front 237 Rear 237 Towing protection 40 Traction Control System TCS 133 Traffic sign recognition 161 Function 161 Information messages 162 Traffic Sign Recognition Notifications and settings 162 Traffic signs see Traffic sign recognition 161 Trailer 164 167 13 pin power socket 168 driving with a trailer 168 loading 167 Safety eye 168 Trailer stabilisation 169 Transport Luggage compartment 85 Roof rack system 98 Transporting children safely 188 Turn signal 53 Turn signal system Warning light 19 Type plate 254 Index 269 Tyre control display Calibration 223 Tyre inflation pressure Warning light 18 Tyre load bearing capacity see Wheels 222 Tyre repair Check pressure 234 Preparations 233 Sealing and inflating the tyre 234 Tyres 220 Inflation pressure 221 New 222 See Wheels 222 Sizes 221 Tyre wear indicator 221 U Underbody protection 198 Unlock Car key 33 Remote Control 34 Unlocking Individual settings 36 KESSY 35 Key 33 Unlocking and locking 32 Unlocking and locking the steering see KESSY 117 Useful equipment 74 12 volt power outlet 79 230 volt power socket 83 Ashtray 78 Car park ticket holder 75 Cigarette lighter 78 Clothes hook 82 Cup holders 77 Glasses storage box 80 Holder for refle
111. 3 Windscreen wipers 63 Licht COMING HOME LEAVING HOME 57 Light Cockpit 58 Replacing bulbs 247 Tourist light 54 Light bulbs Rear light Octavia Estate 252 Rear light Octavia 250 Lighting Luggage compartment 85 Lights 5l Adaptive headlights AFS 54 Automatic driving lamp control 53 Daytime running lights 52 Fog lights 56 Fog lights with the CORNER function 56 Hazard warning light system 57 Headlight beam adjustment 52 Headlight flasher 53 Low beam 52 Main beam 53 Parking lights 58 Rear fog light 56 Side lights 52 Switching on off 52 Turn signal 53 Warning lights 14 Lights on off 52 Loads 254 Lock Car key 33 Remote Control 34 Locking Individual settings 36 KESSY 35 Key 33 Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside 36 Long cargo channel 84 Low beam 52 Luggage compartment 85 Compartment with cargo element 92 Cover 89 double sided floor covering 88 Emergency unlocking 240 Fastening elements 86 Fix floor covering 88 Fixing nets 87 Foldable hooks Octavia Estate 88 Folding double hooks 87 Lighting Luggage net Multifunction box Multifunction box Octavia Estate Roll up luggage compartment cover Octavia Es tate 85 89 93 94 90 4 see luggage compartment lid Storage compartments under the floor covering _ 92 Stowing roll up luggage compartment cover
112. 6 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME 57 Hazard warning light system 57 Parking lights 58 The lights work only with the ignition on unless otherwise stated On models fitted with right hand steering the position of certain switches differs from that shown in Fig 29 on page 52 The symbols which mark the switch po sitions are identical The low beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the position z0 or AUTO After switching off the ignition the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on The side light goes out after the ignition key is removed Keep the headlights lenses clean The following guidelines must be ob served page 197 Headlight lenses EJ warnine a The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with national legal requirements a The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights The automatic driving lamp control AUTO only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and if necessa ry to switch on the light depending on the given light conditions The light sensor cannot for example detect rain or snow Under these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights i Note a f there is a fault in the light switch the low beam comes on automatically a The headlights may mist up temporarily When the driving lights ar
113. 98 RON Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 95 91 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON Unleaded petrol 91 RON can al so be used but results in a slight loss in performance Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating 91 RON if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Unleaded petrol with higher octane number Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the en gine can be used without limitations On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95 91 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power in crease or a lower fuel consumption On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating91 RON of unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available Even in the event of an emergency petrol of
114. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm danger area From this moment on do not continue driving The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device The danger area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device For information on setting the acoustic signals and a description of the Infotain ment display see Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings button CAR Activation deactivation The system is automatically activated when you shift into reverse or after press ing the symbol button Pa Fig 130 The symbol P lights up in the button activa tion is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal The system is deactivated by moving out of reverse gear either by pressing the symbol buttonP or automatically at a speed exceeding 10 km h the symbol P in the button goes out On vehicles which only have rear sensors the system can only be deactivated by moving out of reverse gear Towing a trailer On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device only the areas A and Fig 130 of the system are active when operating a trailer there is no road display Automatic system activation when moving forward First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 135 Automatic activation takes place at a speed below around 10 km h under the fol lowing conditions gt The distance to
115. A yellow warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel Please note the following if you intend to use this wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Be specially attentive when driving gt The inflation pressure for the temporary spare wheel is identical to the maxi mum inflation pressure of the standard tyres gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for long term use EJ WARNING a Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fit ted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering CAUTION Observe instructions on the warning sign of the emergency wheel Full wheel trim First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 220 Pulling off gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the wheel trim gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim Install gt Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the valve opening provided gt Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks cor rectly in place CAUTION a Use the pressure of your hand only do not strike the full wheel trim Avoid heav
116. AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 71 The front passenger seat can be folded forward into a horizontal position Folding forward gt Place the lever in position 1 Fig 56 gt Fold the seat backrest forward in the direction of the arrow 2 The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place Folding backwards gt Place the lever in position 1 Fig 56 gt Fold the seat backrest in the opposite direction of the arrow 2 The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place F WARNING The front passenger airbag should be switched off when transporting ob jects on the seat which was folded forwards page 186 a Adjust the seat backrest only when the vehicle is stationary a When moving the seat backrest make sure the seat backrest has been properly secured check by pulling on the seat backrest a f the seat backrest is folded passengers may only be transported on the outer seat behind the driver When moving the seat backrest keep limbs away from between the seat cushion and seat backrest risk of injury a Never transport objects on the seat backrest which was folded forwards which a impair driver visibility make it impossible for the driver to control the vehicle e g if they are placed under the pedals or could protrude into the driver s zone could lead to injury to passengers due to a change of direction or braking manouvre when accelerating sharply Seat backr
117. B or adjustment wheel D Fig 10 on page 30 The following values of the selected memory are set to zero gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven 30 Using the system gt Average speed gt Driving time Since start The memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Long term The memory gathers driving information from any number of individual journeys up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9999 kilometres driven The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation Starts all over again Since refuel The memory gathers driving information since the last refuelling The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up i Note Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data Warning at excessive speeds Fig 11 Buttons adjustment wheel on the operating lever multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 28 Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt Press button A Fig 11 or turn adjustment wheel D to select menu item Warning at gt Press
118. CO gt emission levels combined in g km Type plate The nameplate Fig 232 B located at the bottom of the B pillar on the driver s side The type plate lists the following weights Maximum permissible gross weight 9 Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome This number is al so located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code The VIN can also be displayed in the Infotainment Operating instructions for In fotainment chapter Setting vehicle systems Engine number The engine number is stamped into the engine block Operating weight The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only This value repre sents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equip ment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight H The payload consists of t
119. Closing gt Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop the cover must click into place Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button B Fig 76 is not visible from the boot E WARNING The through loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured removable through loading bag page 84 84 Using the system Removable ski bag Fig 77 Securing the through loading bag B5E 0116 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The removable through loading bag is solely used for transporting skis Loading gt Open the luggage compartment lid gt Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards page 84 gt Place the empty removable through loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot gt Push the skis into the removable through loading bag from the boot H gt Close the through loading bag Securing gt Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bind ings Fig 77 gt Fold the seat backrest a little forward gt Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking button clicks into place check by p
120. Depending on the vehicle model and equipment other additional operating man uals and instructions may be provided e g an operating manual for the Infotain ment Radio If one of the documents listed above is missing please contact a KODA Partner Terms used The on board literature contains the following terms relating to the service work for your vehicle gt Specialist garage a company that carries out specialist service tasks for SKODA vehicles gt KODA service partner a company that is contractually authorized by KODA AUTO a s to carry out service tasks for KODA vehicles gt KODA Partners a company that is authorized by KODA AUTO a s to sell SKODA products or carry out service work or to carry out these tasks in parallel The owner s manual This owner s manual describes all possible equipment variants without identify ing them as special equipment model variants or market dependent equipment Consequently this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment compo nents described in this owner s manual The scope of equipment in your vehicle relates to your sales contract for the vehi cle More information is available from the SKODA Partner where you bought the vehicle This owner s manual describes a wide range of electronic functions and systems Information about how to configure these electronic functions and systems can be found in the operating instructions to Infotainmen
121. EAK An audible signal is also emitted Assist systems 163 Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Description 164 Setting the ready position 165 Installing the ball rod 165 Check proper fitting 166 Removing the ball rod 166 Use and care 167 If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with a towing device or is fitted with a towing device from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection be tween the vehicle and trailer If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connec tor you can use a Suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories Maximum Trailer drawbar load weight is 75 kg or 80 kg for the Octavia Estate 4x4 vehicles E warnine Before each time you make a journey when using the ball rod check that it is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess Do not operate the ball rod if it is not correctly inserted in the mounting re cess Do not operate the towing device if it is damaged or incomplete Do not perform any modifications or changes to the towing device a Never release the ball rod while the trailer is still coupled CAUTION Handle the ball rod carefully to avoid damaging the paintwork on the bumper 164 Driving Description Fig 153 Carrier of the
122. Emergency ignition shutoff system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 In an emergency it is possible to switch off the ignition even at speeds greater than 2 km h by using the emergency ignition shutoff system gt Press the starter button Fig 117 on page 117 for longer than 1 second or twice within 1 second CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information for braking SS Handbrake 120 FJ warnine Greater physical effort for braking is required when the engine is switched off risk of accident a During the braking procedure on a vehicle with manual transmission when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs press the clutch pedal If you fail to do so the functionality of the brake booster can be impaired risk of accident a f a front spoiler full wheel trim etc is mounted retrospectively it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative impact on the functioning of the braking system risk of accident Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The children might for ex ample release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The vehicle might then move off risk of accident CAUTION a Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 126 a Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if b
123. H on page 161 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Norestriction at present No maximum speeds were recognised e g on German motorways where there is no speed limit Error traffic sign recognition A system error is present Seek help from a specialist garage Traffic sign recognition clean windscreen The windscreen is dirty iced over or misted up in the camera viewing range Clean the windscreen or remove the obstacles O Traffic sign recognition restricted Infotainment Navigation is not currently providing any data Check whether the maps are up to date or the whether the vehicle is currently in a location for which no navigation data are available QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 163 Information messages __ GB EJ warninec a For the driving ability is always the driver s responsibility Never drive if you feel tired a The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed a Therefore take regular sufficient breaks during long trips a There will be no system warning during the so called micro sleep Note a In some situations the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus mistakenly recommend a break e g sporty driving in adverse weather conditions or in bad road conditions The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving Function First read and
124. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Octavia Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Sub ject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the informa tion you are looking for Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement All values are expressed in metric units Explanation of symbols a Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety advice in a chapter Denotes the end of a section Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possi ble Denotes a registered trademark Denotes the display in the information display Denotes the display in the segment display Ov E Notes E warnine The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury
125. The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury EI WARNING As the driver observe the following instructions a Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is mov ing a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and a dis tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate EJ WARNING As the front passenger observe the following instructions a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel No
126. Transporting children safely gt If not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjusted Airbagsystem 185 gt If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt If other seats have been installed e g orthopaedic seats without side airbags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key operated switch page 186 Deactivating the front passenger airbag We recommend that you ask a SKODA service partner to deactivate any other air bags as appropriate Monitoring the airbag system The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off Airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment gt The warning light 2 lights up for approx 4 seconds after switching on the igni tion and then flashes again for approx 12 seconds Front passenger airbag switched off with the key switch in the storage com partment gt The warning light 2 comes on for about 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt The OFF 2 warning light 3 Fig 171 on page 186 comes on after the ignition is switched on fi Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed a A SKODA service partner will be able to inform you which if any of your vehi cle s airbags can or must be deactivat
127. UTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand risk of damage CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Interior mirror s Additional interior mirror 65 Exterior mirrors 66 E WARNING a Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice snow mist or other objects Convex curved outward exterior mirrors increase the field of vision They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehi cles Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles a The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to operation al faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror risk of accident 64 Using the system EI wARNING Automatic dimming mirrors contain an electrolytic fluid which may leak should the mirror glass break a The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin eyes and breath apparatus Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle If this is not possible open all windows and doors a If you swallow electrolytic fluid seek medical assistance immediately a f your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water Then con sult a doctor immediately CAUTION Never mechanically fol
128. Vehicle settings CAR button Automatic wipe wash for windscreen The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wipers wipe somewhat later The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km h Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 3 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen At a speed of more than 2 km h the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen This func tion can be activated deactivated by a specialist garage Automatic wipe wash for the rear window The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wiper wipes somewhat later Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 3 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen The lever remains in position 6 Automatic rear window wipe Octavia Estate If the windscreen wiper is in position 2 Fig 43 or 3 the rear window is wiped every 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle s speed exceeds 5 km h When automatic windscreen wiping is active when raining the lever is in the po sition 1 the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in continu ous mode no break between each wiping process Automatic rear window wiping can be activated deactivated in t
129. You cannot properly seal with tyre with the break down kit gt Seek help from a specialist garage If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value see inside of fuel filler cap gt Continue driving carefully to the nearest SKODA specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km h CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle _ SSCS 3 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 236 EI warnine a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C If the battery is frozen do not carry out a jump start with the battery of another vehicle risk of explosion a Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment page 206 The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each other risk of short circuit The jump start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle risk of short circuit Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis charged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in th
130. a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Fuel additives Only use unleaded petrol which complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany Standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 98 RON as these meet all of the requirements for fault free engine operation We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used Inspecting and replenishing 205 CAUTION a All SKODA vehicles with petrol engines must only be operated with unleaded petrol Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust sys tem a If in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible a Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used a Inno case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content Do not use any LRPfuel types lead replacement petrol fuels with metal constituents risk of serious damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system Do not use any fuels with metal constitue
131. abled V TCS is enabled page 132 Brake assist systems vZ On vehicles with a manual transmission the second gear or higher must be engaged Z On vehicles with a manual transmission the current speed must be higher than approx 25 km h Z On vehicles with an automatic transmission the selector lever must be in the D S position or in the Tiptronic position v On vehicles with an automatic transmission the current speed must be high er than approx 2 km h If control is enabled the green indicator light illuminates in the warning light bar Note a f control is started at a speed of less than 30 km h on vehicles with an auto matic transmission the speed of 30 km h is stored The speed increases auto matically to 30 km h or is regulated with respect to the speed of the vehicle ahead a When TCS is disabled it will be activated automatically upon starting control a f the TCS is deactivated during control control is stopped automatically Stop resume control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 Stop control gt Push the lever into the sprung position CANCEL Fig 139 on page 146 Or gt Apply the brake Control stops the speed remains stored Resume control gt Start control page 146 Note Control is also stopped when the clutch is held down for longer than 30 s Set change the desired speed First read and observe the introductory informati
132. acceleration Reactivate the TCS and START STOP when the desired speed has been reached Kickdown The kickdown function allows you to achieve the maximum acceleration of your vehicle while driving When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown function is activated in any forward driving mode The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed and engine speed and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range E WARNING Rapid acceleration particularly on slippery roads can lead to loss of control of the vehicle risk of accident Malfunction First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Emergency programme The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in sys tem of the automatic gearbox The emergency program can make itself apparent by the following for example gt Only certain gears are selected gt The reverse gear R cannot be used gt Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible Gearbox overheating The transmission may for example become too hot due to frequent and succes sive starting or stop and go traffic Overheating is indicated by the warning light page 14 lt Automatic gearbox Defective selector lever lock If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is int
133. accident a Never drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poi soning a Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment lid it could crack risk of injury l CAUTION a f the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is automatically locked right away as soon as it is closed a Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment lid it could crack The function of the handle above the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or at a speed of 5 km hour or more for vehicles with central locking The func tion is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is opened Opening Closing Fig 21 Handle in the inner panelling of the boot lid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 After unlocking the boot lid can be opened with the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the handle A Fig 20 and raise the lid in the direction of the arrow B Closing gt Pull the lid down the handle C Fig 21 and close with a slight swing Automatic locking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 40 If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is automatically locked right away as soon as it is closed The period after which th
134. acing the battery in the auxiliary heater remote control Fig 206 Radio remote control Battery cover B5E 0220 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 238 The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote con trol Fig 206 gt Insert a flat blunt object such as a coin into the gap of the battery cover gt Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the cover gt Replace the battery gt Return the battery cover gt Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking engage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking locking the driver s door 240 Locking a door 240 Unlocking the tailgate _ 24 Selector lever emergency unlocking 241 Emergency equipment and self help 239 Unlocking locking the driver s door B5E 0028 Fig 207 Handle on the driver s door covered locking cylinder locking cylin der with key AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 239 gt Pull on the handle gt Push the vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover in the re gion of the arrow and fold it upwards Fig 207 A gt Insert the vehicle key the buttons facing upward into the locking cylinder and lock unlock the vehicle Fig 207 B CAUTION Make sure you do not damage the paint when perfo
135. ad depth to the front wheels Explanation of tyre markings 195 65 R 15 91T What this means is Tyre width in mm Fig 188 on page 221 B Height width ratio in Fig 188 on page 221 B Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Fig 188 on page 221 Diameter of wheel in inches Fig 188 on page 221 B Load index V Speed symbol H The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall possibly only on the inside of wheel e g DOT 10 13 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 10th week of 2013 Load index This indicates the maximum permisible load on each indvidua tyre 91 615 kg 92 630kg 93 650kg 94 670kg 95 690kg 97 730kg 99 7755kg Speed symbol This indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed with mounted tyres for the respective category M 130 km h Q 160 km h R 170 km h S 180 km h T 190 km h U 200 km h H 210 km h V 240 km h W 270 km h Y 300 km h CAUTION The information about the load index and the speed symbol for your vehicle are listed in your vehicle documents Unidirectional tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to obtain the best benefits from the characteristics of these ty
136. afety warn ings H on page 114 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light o gt comes on after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine just after the indicator light o gt goes out Starting off and Driving 115 You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating pe riod otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Place the gearshift lever into neutral or place the selector lever in the position P or N and firmly put on the handbrake gt Switch on the ignition 2 Fig 116 on page 115 gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt Turn the key into position 3 as far as it will go and release immediately do not touch the accelerator After letting go the vehicle key will return to position 2 If the engine does not start within 10 seconds turn the key to position 1 Repeat the start up process after approx half a minute gt Release the handbrake Vehicles with manual transmission The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the information cluster display Press the clutch to start 8 PRESS CLUTCH Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed The wa
137. age compartment cover net par tition behind the rear seats in the pulled out state Fig 103 Net partition Release lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 96 Pulling out gt Fold out part of the roll up luggage compartment cover A in the direction of the arrow Fig 102 gt Pull out the net partition at the upper crossbar B from the housing C gt Hook the crossbar into one of the receptacles D gt On ae side press on the crossbar and hook it into the appropriate recep tacle D If the cross bar is hooked into the receptacle D for example the press on the cross bar in the direction of arrow 1 and insert into the receptacle to the right D gt Fold back part of the roll up luggage compartment cover A in the opposite di rection of the arrow Folding gt Fold out part of the roll up luggage compartment cover A in the direction of the arrow Fig 102 gt Press on the crossbar and remove it from the receptacles D first on one side then on the other side gt Hold the crossbar B in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing C without being damaged gt Fold back part of the roll up luggage compartment cover A in the opposite di rection of the arrow CAUTION If the net partition blocks when pulling it out of the housing push the release lev er E in the direction of the arrow Fig 103 Ka Note
138. ake fluid Handbrake Running in Warning lights 132 214 120 126 15 Braking Information for braking Breakdown kit Break recommendation See Fatigue detection Bulbs Replacing Warning icon Button in the driver s door Electrical power windows T19 119 233 162 247 22 44 C Car computer see multifunction display 28 Cargo element 92 Car key lock 33 unlock 33 Car park ticket holder 75 Carrier 98 Cavity protection 197 Central locking button 36 Changing Brake fluid 215 Engine oil 212 Wheels 229 Changing a wheel Follow up tasks 230 Preparation 229 Removing and refitting a wheel 230 Charging a vehicle battery 218 Check Fit ball head properly 166 Checking Battery electrolyte level 217 Brake fluid 214 Coolant 213 Engine oil 211 Oil level 211 Windscreen washer fluid 209 Children and safety 188 Child safety Side airbag 190 Child safety lock 37 Child safety seat Use of child safety seats 190 Child seat Classification 190 ISOFIX 191 on the front passenger seat 189 TOP TETHER 192 Use of ISOFIX child seats 191 Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle 196 Cigarette lighter 78 Cleaning 193 Alcantara 199 Artificial leather 199 cloths 199 Covers of electrically heated seats 200 Headlight lenses 197 Natural
139. al of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork a It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed a The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de ployed 180 Safety System description First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 180 The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light 2 in the instrument cluster page 18 When the airbags are deployed they fill with gas and inflate A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle The airbag system consists depending on the vehicle equipment of the following modules gt Electronic control unit gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger page 182 gt Driver s knee airbag page 183 gt Side airbags page 183 gt Head airbags page 184 gt Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster page 18 gt Key switch for the front passenger airbag page 186 gt Warning light for the front passenger airbag activation in dash panel cen tre page 186
140. and tighten gt Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in The protective grille must engage firmly Fuses and light bulbs 249 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light a Fig 224 Remove the number plate light replace the bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 gt Open the luggage compartment lid gt Insert a slotted screwdriver at the location indicated by the arrow Fig 224 A press it in lightly and unlatch the springs gt Remove the lamp gt Pull the faulty bulb out of the holder in the direction of the arrow Fig 224 B gt Insert a new bulb into the holder gt Replace the lamp and lightly press it until the spring latches Rear light Octavia B5E 0070 Fig 225 Remove cover light 250 Do it yourself Fig 226 Installing the lamp connector lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 Removing gt Open the luggage compartment lid gt Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 228 Vehicle tool kit into the hole at the Position indicated by the arrow Fig 225 A gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 225 A gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit Fig 225 B to unscrew the lamp gt Grip the rear lamp assembly and carefully remove it by waggling it and pulling op
141. apter or the rear side of the anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from a SKODA Partner if necessary a We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit 232 Do it yourself CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Breakdown kit 283 Preparations for using the breakdown kit 233 Sealing and inflating the tyre 234 Check after 10 minutes driving C284 Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all intended to replace a per manent repair on the tyre Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga rage The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately Do not remove foreign bodies e g screws or nails from the tyre The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt There is damage to the rim gt The outside temperature is less than 20 C gt The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size gt There is damage to the tyre wall gt Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt If the use by date see inflation bottle has passed E WARNING a A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre Do not
142. arily disabled when the engine starts and the LED flashes red After starting the engine the power socket is re activated automatically a Do not connect any lamps with neon filaments to the 230 V power socket risk of damaging the lamp a A larger current surge may arise in some power supplies e g for notebooks when connecting them to a 230 V power socket this will automatically deacti vate the power socket In this case disconnect the power supply from the con Sumer and connect the power supply to the power socket first followed by the consumer Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices Seats and useful equipment 83 Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel Fig 76 Rear seats Cover handle boot Unlock button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 After folding the rear armrest and cover up an opening in the seat backrest be comes visible through which the removable through loading bag with skis can be pushed The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passenger com partment or the boot Opening from the passenger compartment gt Fold the rear armrest dow not as far as the stop page 72 gt Pull the handle A Fig 76 in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover downwards Opening from the boot gt Push the unlock button B Fig 76 in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover including the armrest forwards
143. arking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was passed Park Assist currently not available The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage Park Assist stopped currently not available The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage Park Assist faulty Workshop The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists in the system Seek help from a specialist garage Park Assist stopped Take over steering Assume control of the steering Complete the parking procedure without using the system ASR intervention Take over steering The parking procedure is terminated by a TCS intervention Park Assist indicate and engage reverse The prerequisites for manoeuvring out of a parking space using the system have been met Switch on the turn signals and shift into reverse Please take over steering and drive on The manoeuvring procedure out of a parallel parking space has ended Assume control of the steering Aut parking space exit not possible Space too small The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible The parking gap is too small Braking intervention Speed too high The driving speed during the parking procedure was too high automatic brake assist is initiated CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the followin
144. as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water If you swallow battery acid seek immediate medical assistance FI WARNING a t is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light a Smoking or to carrying out any activities which produce sparks are prohibi ted a Never use a damaged vehicle battery risk of explosion a Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery risk of explosion and caustic burns Replace a frozen vehicle battery a Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns EI warninc a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on a Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery e g with a metal object or cable creates a short circuit risk of melting the lead bars and risk of ex plosion battery fire and acid splashes a Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the engine the ignition and all of the electrical components and disconnect the negative terminal on the battery 216 General Maintenance CAUTION a The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off oth
145. ately Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light amp in the display is lit Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant page 213 The following guidelines must be observed page 21 Coolant The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating E warnine a Never use the safety eye to tow a vehicle Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic sit uation BE WARNING Continued Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle s entire electrical system as well as acci dents and severe injuries Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist garages a Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical con nections for the tail lights or other current sources Note a After coupling the trailer and connecting up the power socket check the rear lights on the trailer to ensure they work a f there is an error in the trailer lighting system check the fuses in the fuse box in the dashboard page 245 a Contact between the breakaway cable and the safety eye can result in mechan ical wear on the protective surface of the eye Such wear does not impair the functioning of the safety eye and is not a fault It is excluded from the warranty coverage a If you tow a trailer frequently have your car inspected between service inter vals too a T
146. ats AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 71 The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the two outer rear seats can be heated electrically The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running Switching on gt Press the corresponding symbol button a or Fig 53 By pressing the button once the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3 which is indicated by three of the warning lights underneath the respec tive switch Fig 53 A or in the respective button Fig 53 B lighting up With repeated pressing of the switch the level of the seat heating is down regu lated up to the switch off The level of the seat heating is indicated by the num ber of illuminated warning lights underneath in the switch FJ warninc If you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medi cation paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend not to use the seat heating This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recom mend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition CAUTION Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them Do not
147. avi gation alke Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag Button for hazard warning light system Interior rear view mirror Storage compartment on the front passenger side Front passenger airbag prg f gury f pry G pry G pry G pr Ol A I buy yn CD DVD drive and memory card slot in the passenger side storage compartment owner s manual for the Infotainment radio and or navigation Air outlet vent on the front passenger side S 182 WO 28 27 102 102 Ed AINAINNA S S s s _ R Ey Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag in front passenger storage compartment Door opening lever on the front passenger side Power window in the front passenger door Light switch Storage compartment on the driver s side Fuse box behind the storage compartment on the driver s side _ Bonnet release lever Operating lever for adaptive cruise control Lever for adjusting the steering wheel Ignition lock Pedals Storage compartment phone box Infotainment manual chap ter Phonebox Handbrake lever Depending on equipment fitted gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox gt Selector lever automatic gearbox Depending on equipment fitted gt Operating controls for the heating gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system gt Operating controls for Climatronic Depending on equipment fitted gt 12 Volt power socket gt Ci
148. ay The Laptimer function is operated with the buttons on the control lever or the buttons on the steering wheel page 27 Information display The calculated times are displayed in minutes seconds and deciseconds Activate Laptimer function gt From the main menu of the information display select the menu item Laptimer The following functions are available a Start Start the timing manually or continue the interrupted measurement From Start Start the timer automatically upon start up Statistics Evaluate and reset the measured times Time measurement Manually start the measurement gt Select the menu item Laptimer Start Start the measurement automatically gt Select the menu item Laptimer From Start Timing will begin automatically when starting up Start timing of next round gt Select the menu item New round during timing During timing information about the fastest and the last lap time are also dis played in the information display Measure split time gt During the timing select the menu item split time The split time data is dis played for about 5 seconds in the information display The split time can be measured repeatedly during a round Stop measurement gt During the timing press the menu item Stop The time measurement is stopped the following functions are now available Continue Continue measurement of the current lap time New round Start measurement of the next la
149. ay of the instrument cluster The automatic start procedure takes place again During the STOP phase the engine fires up without any active driver intervention e g in the following situations gt The vehicle begins to roll e g on a slope gt The difference between the temperature setting of the air conditioning sys tem heating and the temperature of the interior is too large gt The windscreen heater is switched on gt The intensive windscreen heater Climatronic or windscreen heater ventilation is switched on with the maximum air temperature setting manual air condition ing system gt The brake pedal was pressed several times the pressure in the braking system is too low gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The current consumption is too high Manually activating deactivating the system Fig 146 Button for the START STOP sys tem B5E 0151 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Activation deactivation gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 146 When start stop mode is deactivated the warning light in the button lights up al _ Note a f the system is deactivated during the STOP phase the automatic start proce dure takes place a Selecting the driving mode Eco when the system is deactivated will automati cally activate the system page 156 Assist systems 155 Information messages First read and ob
150. be disabled page 152 Seek help from a specialist garage CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Starting shutting down the engine gt Y 154 Operating conditions of the system 155 Manually activating deactivating the system 155 Information messages __ BG The START STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing harmful exhaust emissions and CO emissions The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on In the start stop mode the engine automatically switches to the vehicle s idle phase e g when stopped at traffic lights The engine restarts automatically where necessary Information about the current status of the system can be displayed in the Info tainment display operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle set tings CAR button The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met J The driver s door is closed Z Thedriver has fastened the seat belt J The bonnet is closed v The driving speed was higher than 4 km h after the last stop J Notrailer is coupled F WARNING The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off CAUTION Always deactivate the START STOPsystem before driving through wa ter page 130 Assist systems 153 Note a f the driver s seat belt is removed for
151. be operated in closed rooms e g garages risk of poisoning a The auxiliary heating parking heating must not be running during refuelling risk of fire The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located underneath the vehicle Therefore if you wish to operate the auxiliary heating parking heating do not park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust gases can come into con tact with highly flammable materials e g dry grass or easily inflammable sub stances e g spilt fuel risk of fire CAUTION a The running auxiliary heating parking heating consumes fuel from the vehicle tank and automatically controls the filling level If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank the auxiliary heater switches itself off a The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating which is located underneath the vehi cle must not be clogged up and the exhaust flow must not be blocked a If the auxiliary heating is running the vehicle battery discharges If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer period the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehicle battery T Note a The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on if it has reached a coolant temperature of approx 50 C a At low outside temperatures this can result in a formation of water vapour in the area of the engine compartment This is quite normal and is not an operating problem a The air
152. before hitching the trailer to the vehicle Safety eye The purpose of the safety eyelet B Fig 158 is to attach the breakaway cable of the trailer 168 Driving When attaching the breakaway cable to the safety eye it must sag freely in all trailer positions sharp bends in reverse etc Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors The national legal requirements must be observed Headlights The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being towed and the head lights may dazzle other road users Adjust the headlights using the headlight beam control page 52 Side lights and low beam Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than 80 km h when hitching a trailer Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trail er is detected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by accelerating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Engine overheating If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale the speed must be reduced immedi
153. bol button amp on the remote control key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt In the KESSY system hold a finger on the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 35 By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor on the KESSY system 1 the closing process is immediately interrupted Tilting roof gt Press and hold the symbol button on the remote control key F WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing i Note a The sliding tilting roof cannot be opened using the convenience operating fea ture a In case of a fault with the sliding tilting roof seek assistance from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 49 Opening closing the sun screen 49 Convenience operation of Sliding tilting roof 50 The panoramic sliding tilting roof abbreviated in the following as sliding tilting roof can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is higher than 20 C The sliding tilting roof can still be operated for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as the driver or front passenger s door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof CAUTION a Always close the sliding tilting roof before disconnecting the battery
154. bulb in the holder anti clockwise to the stop and remove gt Insert a new bulb in the holder and turn clockwise to the stop gt Re insert the holder and bulb into the lamp housing and turn clockwise to the stop Fuses and light bulbs 253 Technical data CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle identification data 254 Dimensions 256 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type 257 The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual The listed performance values were determined without performance reducing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification data Pes ee SE Ee mmm mm mss M AUSST OPTIONS EOA 1D0 SSI rte 4 6EF 1AT 3FA 86 Mi Fig 232 Vehicle data sticker type plate 254 Technical data Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 254 Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 232 A is located on the base of the luggage com partment and is also fixed in the service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data 1 Vehicle identification number VIN 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output engine code 4 Partial vehicle description 5 Operating weight in kg 6 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km intra urban extra urban combined
155. button in the area of the symbol Fig 35 Switching off the light gt Press the button in the area of the symbol O Fig 35 Operating with the door contact switch gt Place the button in the middle position On vehicles without an interior monitor the middle position is marked with the symbol Fig 35 A 58 Using the system Switching the reading light on off AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 gt Press the button 7 or Fig 36 If operating the light with the door contact switch is enabled the light will come The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior light page 58 on when one of the following events occurs gt The vehicle is unlocked gt One of the doors or the luggage compartment lid is being opened Switching lamp without reading lights on off gt Press the button Fig 37 A gt The ignition key is removed Switching the reading light on off If operating the light with the door contact switch is enabled the light will go off gt Press the button 7 or SX Fig 37 B when one of the following events occurs gt The vehicle is locked gt The ignition is switched on gt About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed i Note a If the interior light remains switched on when the ignition is switched off or if one of the doors is open the light will automatically go out after around 10 mi nutes a
156. c cessories with a two pin 230V plug with a total power uptake of up to 150 watt The power socket and the connected electrical devices only work if the igni tion is switched on Improper use can lead to serious injury or fire Therefore never leave chil dren unattended in the vehicle risk of injury a Safely stow away all connected devices during the journey to prevent them from being thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking ma noeuvre or an accident risk of death Do not pour liquids into the power socket risk of death If fluid does man age to get into the power socket completely dry out the socket before reuse The connected appliances may behave differently to when connected to the mains a The connected devices may warm up during operation risk of injury or fire a The child lock on the 230 Volt power socket is unlocked when using ener gised adapters and extension cables risk of injury Do no insert any conductive objects into the contacts of the power socket e g knitting needs risk of death CAUTION Place the connector on the electrical device into the power socket as far as it can go to create a connection between the contacts a f the connector of the electrical device is not inserted fully into the power sock et the child safety lock might release and the power socket be activated The electrical device is nevertheless not connected a The 230 volt power socket is tempor
157. ce batteries older than 5 years Battery cover Fig 186 Engine compartment Polyester cover of vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 215 The battery is located in the engine compartment in some models underneath a polyester cover Fig 186 gt Fold out the cover on the battery in the direction of the arrow The battery cover is installed in reverse order The edge of the polyester battery cover is inserted between the battery and the side wall of the battery cover when working on the battery Checking the battery electrolyte level Fig 187 Vehicle battery Electrolyte level indicator First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 215 On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator the so called magic eye Fig 187 the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist ga rage e
158. cluster display O Error Light Assist LIGHT ASSIST FAULT Seek help from a specialist garage Light Assist clean the windscreen WINDSCREEN PLEASE CLEAN Check for any obstacles on the windscreen in the viewing area of the camera F warnine Headlight assist only functions as a support and does not relieve the driver of his responsibility to check the headlights and light beam and if necessary to switch on the lights depending on the light conditions Manual operation may be required in the following situations a Poor visibility conditions e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall a The oncoming traffic is partially blocked on roads or motorways a Passing poorly lit road users e g cyclists a Driving around sharp curves a Driving on sharp slopes up large inclines a Driving through poorly lit locations a Driving over highly reflective surfaces a The windscreen around the camera is dirty iced up misted up or covered by stickers a Near the camera lens there is a light source such as the screen of an exter nal navigation system Lights and visibility 55 CAUTION a Do not attach any stickers or similar objects to the windscreen to avoid impair ing the functions of the Assist system Fog lights Fig 33 a d m 0 Y a p ac Fi B5E 0103 AA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 Switching on off gt Turn the light switch to po
159. contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants a You will find further information on safety which concerns you and those travelling with you in the following chapters of this Owner s Manual a The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This ap plies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle 1 Not valid for sport seats Safety equipment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 171 The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle gt Three point seat belts for all the seats gt Belt force limiters for the front seats gt Belt tensioners for the front seats gt Seat belt height adjusters for front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger gt Driver s knee airbag gt Front side airbags gt Rear side airbags gt Head airbags gt Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system gt Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system gt Head restraints adjustable for height gt Adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjust
160. ctivating deactivating 152 City emergency braking 152 Information messages 153 Instructions and Information 150 Operation 151 Radar sensor 150 Front door warning light 60 Front interior light 58 Fuel 204 Diesel 206 Fuel gauge 1 refer to Fuel 204 Refuelling 204 Unleaded petrol 205 Warning icon 23 Fuel consumption 126 Fuses Assignment 243 Assignment of fuses in the dash panel 245 Colour coding 243 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment __ 246 Plastic clip 246 Replacing 243 G Gear Recommended gear 26 Gear changing lever 121 General view Cockpit 7 Glasses storage box 80 Glow plug system Warning light 18 H Handbrake 120 Warning light 15 Hazard warning light system 57 HBA 134 Head airbag 184 Headlight assist 55 Warning icon 23 Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system 64 Headlights Driving abroad 131 Headlight cleaning system 64 Replacing a bulb 248 Head restraint 69 Heater Windscreen and rear window 60 Heating Defrosting windows 104 Exterior mirrors 66 operating 103 Recirculated air mode 104 Seats 71 HHC 134 Hill Hold Control HHC 134 Hooks Octavia Estate 88 Horn 7 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 134 Ice warning Waning icon 24 Ignition see Ignition lock 115 Ignition lock 115 Immobiliser 115 Individual mode 157 Index 265 Individual settings
161. ctive Further information page 202 Component protection Fault display If there is a fault in the instrument cluster the following message will appear in the display 0 Error Instrument cluster Workshop COMBIINSTRUM_WORKSHOP Seek help from a specialist garage 1 During the journey the speed can be displayed in a different unit mph or km h in addition to the tachometer display FI warnine a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Never operate the button 6 in the instrument cluster Fig 2 on page 9 while driving only when the vehicle is stationary Overview Fig 2 Instrument cluster First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 1 Revolutions counter with warning lights page 10 2 Display page 10 gt With counter for distance driven page 12 With service interval display page 12 With digital clock page 12 With information system page 25 gt With control symbols page 20 3 Speedometer with warning lights page 10 4 Coolant temperature gauge page 11 vv v Instruments and warning lights 9 5 Bar with warning lights page 14 6 Button for gt Set hours minutes page 12 gt Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval page 12 gt Resetting Service Interval Display page 12 Caan gt Reset trip co
162. ctive vest 76 Map pockets on the front seats 82 270 Index Multimedia holder 79 Removable ski bag 84 Seat backrest with long cargo channel 84 Storage compartment in rear centre console _ 82 Storage compartment in the front centre console 77 Storage compartment on the driver s side 75 Storage compartment on the passenger side 81 Storage compartments in the doors 76 Storage compartment under the front armrest _ 80 Storage compartment under the passenger seat 81 Using the selector lever 22 V Variable loading floor 94 Dividing the luggage compartment 96 Folding up 96 Position change 95 Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation 219 Charge level indicator 12 charging 218 Checking the electrolyte level 217 Cover 217 Disconnecting and reconnecting 218 Operation in winter 217 replacing 218 Safety instructions 215 Warning icon 21 Vehicle care Alcantara 199 Artificial leather 199 Cloths 199 Vehicle condition see Auto check control 13 Vehicle data sticker 254 Vehicle dimensions 256 Vehicle height 256 vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number 254 Vehicle length 256 Vehicle tool kit Vehicle width Vest Holder for reflective vest 228 256 76 Visibility Visors see Sun screen see Sun visors W Warning at excessive speeds 60 61 61 31 Warning icons 20
163. cts may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions a Always store vehicle care products safely in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning CAUTION a Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible stains on the material leather panels and textiles Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe pol ish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possible Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel there is a risk of dam age to the dash panel a Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the window aerial These may get damaged a Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush risk of damage to the surface of the panelling a Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature in side the vehicle is high a Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product SA For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regula tions i Due to the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any potential prob lems with the cleaning and ca
164. d in or fold back the exterior mirrors with the fold in func tion amp by hand as this will damage the electric drive Eid Note a Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window in the housing on the boot cover is not in use or the light striking the in terior rear view mirror is not affected by other objects a If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off a Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on a f the the electrical exterior mirror setting fails at any time the two mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface a Contact a specialist garage if there is a fault with the power setting function for the exterior mirrors Interior mirror IE Manual dimming mirror Fig 45 Automatic dimming mirror First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 Manual dimming interior mirror gt Adjust the lever towards the windscreen at the lower edge of the mirror the mirror dims A Fig 44 gt Adjust the lever away from the windscreen at the lower edge of the mirror home position B Automatic dimming mirror gt Press the button D the warning light C lights up the mirror is activa ted Fig 45 To deactivate press the button D again the warning light C goes out If auto
165. d or in case of emergency shut off com pletely CAUTION Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehi cle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking a Consumers which are supplied via a 12 V socket can cause the vehicle battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off Note Driving comfort is not disrupted by any shutting off of consumers Often the driv er is not aware of it having taken place Inspecting and replenishing 219 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Service life of tyres 221 New tyres 222 Unidirectional tyres 223 Tyre control display 223 Spare wheel 224 Full wheel trim 225 Wheel bolts 225 Wheel bolts 225 EE WARNING a The national legal requirements must be observed for the use of tyres Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains EI warnine The following instructions for the use of tyres must be observed a During the first 500 km new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appropri ate care should therefore be taken when driving risk of accident On all four wheels use only radial tyres of the same type size rolling cir cumference and the same tread pattern For safety reasons
166. d out by a specialist garage Please also observed the instructions in page 200 Modifications repairs and technical alterations a The area in front of and around the sensor must not be covered with stick ers additional lights or similar items This can lead to impaired function of the sensor risk of accidents l CAUTION The sensor may not be able to distinguish all objects correctly under certain cir cumstances We therefore recommend that you avoid using the ACC in the follow ing cases a When driving through places where metal objects such as metal buildings rail road tracks etc can be found a When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces such as large capacity garages car ferries tunnels and the like Fig 138 Instrument cluster display Examples of ACC status displays CAUTION First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn a Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent free de icer y y ings H on page 143 The ACC can be controlled and the settings adjusted using the control lev el Fig 139 on page 146 or in the Infotainment Infotainment manual chap ter Vehicle settings CAR key Explanation of graphic Fig 137 1 Vehicle detected control active 2 Line which indicates the time interval delay when adjusting 3 Set time interval to the vehicle ahead 4 Vehicle detected control deactivated Assist systems 145 Explanatio
167. der to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle l CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Looking ahead First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore unnec essary accelerating and braking should be avoided If looking ahead when driving less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coast to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Shifting gears and saving energy Fig 124 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gear at approx 2 000 revs min An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe the recommended gear page 26 A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 124 Automatic gearbox gt Slowly apply the accelerator pedal However do not depress it to the kickdown position gt If the accelerator pedal is only depressed slowly an economic driving p
168. direction of one of the arrows 4 68 Using the system Electric front seat adjustment Fig 50 Setting Seating surface backrest First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 67 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Push the switch B Fig 49 in the direction of one of the arrows 3 Fig 50 Set the height of the seat cushion gt Push the switch B Fig 49 in the direction of one of the arrows 5 Fig 50 Adjust the angle of the seat cushion gt Push the switch B Fig 49 in the direction of one of the arrows 4 Fig 50 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Push the switch C Fig 49 in the direction of one of the arrows 6 Fig 50 Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support gt Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows 2 Fig 49 Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support gt Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows 1 Fig 49 The adjusted driver s seat position can be set in the memory of the seat page 70 or the remote control key page 70 i Note If the setting procedure is interrupted you will need to press the button again Head restraints Fig 51 Head restraint front rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 67 Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the u
169. dling of the battery can lead to damage occurring We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage EJ warnine There is a risk of injuries poisoning chemical burns explosions or fire when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system The general applicable safety rules and the following warnings must be observed without exception Keep children away from the vehicle battery Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the bat tery vent openings Protect your eyes by safety glasses or a face shield risk of blindness a Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact with the skin which take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers skin cracks Inspecting and replenishing 215 HE WARNING Continued a If any battery electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes rinse the rele vant eye immediately with clear water for several minutes consult a doctor immediately a Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon
170. ds the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes lt amp Windscreen washer fluid level First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the warning icon amp comes on The following message is shown in the information cluster display Top up washer fluid WASHER FLUID PLEASE TOP UP Top up with liquid page 209 Fd Fuel reserve First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 If the warning icon H comes on there is a fuel reserve of under about 7 litres left The following message is shown in the information cluster display Please refuel Range km PLEASE REFUEL An audible signal sounds as a warning signal Note The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance Headlight assist First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 The warning icon is lit when the headlight assist is activated Further information page 55 Headlight assist amp START STOP system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 20 The warning icons amp indicate the state of the START STOP system Further information page 153 Instruments and warning lights 23 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on pag
171. dscreen heater right Not assigned Not assigned Control unit for auxiliary heating Not assigned CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Headlights 248 Replacing the low beam bulb 248 Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 248 Replacing bulb for daytime running lights and parking lights 249 Replacing the bulb for the fog lights 249 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 250 Rear light Octavia 250 Replacing bulbs in rear light Octavia 251 Rear light Octavia Estate 252 Replacing bulbs in rear light Octavia Estate 252 Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties gt Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs The designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment EJ warnine a Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 206 a Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be se
172. duction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Finding a parking space BB Parking 139 Manoeuvring out of a parallel parking space 140 Automatic brake assist _ 140 Information messages 140 The parking aid is part of the park assist system therefore the information and safety guidelines page 135 Parking aid must also be read and observed Park Assist in the following referred to as the system helps drivers park in suita ble parallel and perpendicular parking places and also to manoeuvre out of paral lel parking spaces The system only operates if the ignition is switched on During the parking procedure the system only takes over the steering move ments the pedals continue to be operated by the driver When the system is activated the warning light Pe Fig 132 on page 138 lights up in the button gt The traction control system TCS must always be switched on when parking Basis of the system function gt The measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving gt The determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking gt The calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the park ing space or forwards from the parking space gt the automatic turning of the front wheels when parking in or manoeuvring out of the parking space Assist systems 137 EI warnine The system does not exempt the drive
173. e Lane following system Lane Assist First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning lights indicates the state of the Lane Assist system Further information page 158 lt a gt Turn signal system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 Either the left or right gt indicator light flashes depending on the position of the control lever If there is a fault in the turn signal system the warning light flashes at twice its normal rate This does not apply when towing a trailer Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash Further information page 53 Turn signal and main beam Trailer turn signal lights First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 if the warning light flashes the trailer turn signal lights are turned on If a trailer is hitched and the warning light lt is not flashing one of the trailer turn signal lights has failed The following message is shown in the information cluster display for example O Trailer check left turn signal TRAILER TURN SIG_ CHECK LEFT The trailer must be unhitched properly page 164 Towing a trailer 0 Fog lights First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ing
174. e 20 The warning icon draws your attention to the risk of ice Further information page 25 24 Using the system gt Warning against excessive speeds page 31 gt Details of the information display page 27 gt Traffic sign recognition page 161 gt Fatigue detection page 162 gt Selector lever positions for an automatic gearbox page 122 gt Information and alerts in the Assist systems page 132 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Outside temperature Information on the display 25 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Outside temperature 25 ings H on page 25 Recommencen gear The current outside temperature is shown in the display Door luggage compartment or bonnet warning 26 Eco tips 26 If the outside temperature drops below 4 C while driving the following symbol Laptimer Stopwatch 26 warning signal for ice on the road appears before the temperature indicator Information display 57 and an audible signal will sound If the outside temperature is less than 4 C when the ignition is turned on the E WARNING following symbol appears in the display and an acoustic signal sounds Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re After pressing the rocker switch a or the adjustment wheel D Fig 10 on sponsible for the operation of your vehicle m page 30 the function shown last is
175. e brake automatically via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a collision again Automatic Braking If the driver fails to respond to the acute warning Front Assist starts to apply the brakes automatically with increasing stopping power in several stages Front Assist can help to mitigate the consequences of a potential accident by means of a speed reduction Brake Support If the driver does not brake sufficiently in case of an imminent collision Front As sist can increase the braking power thereby reducing the consequences of a po tential accident The brake support only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly pressed down CAUTION The automatic braking interventions by Front Assist can be terminated by press ing the clutch or the accelerator or by moving the steering wheel Note If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by Front Assist the pressure in the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the normal pedal stroke 152 Driving Activating deactivating First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 Front Assist is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on Front Assist should only be disabled in exceptional cases Activate deactivate front assist Front Assist can be activated or deactivated in the Infotainment Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings CAR bu
176. e characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down XDS XDL is an extension to the electronic differential lock XDL does not respond to traction but to the relief of the inner front wheel during fast cornering The active brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from spinning Thus the traction is improved and the vehicle can continue to follow the desired track 134 Driving Driver Steer Recommendation DSR First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 The DSR indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle The DSR is activated for example on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal HBA increa ses the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance To achieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be applied firmly until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the HBA The HBA is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released Hill Hold Control HHC First read and observe t
177. e child _ Weight of the child Approximate _Approximateage up to 10 kg up to 13 kg up to 9 months up to 18 months up to 4 years up to 7 years over 7 years 9 18 kg 15 25 kg 22 36 kg Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 188 Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Rear seat middle Front passenger Rear seats seat outside up to 10 kg 0 up to 13 kg J 9 18 kg 2 15 25 kg 3 22 36 kg U Child seat category Universal a child seat designed for fastening on the seat with the seat belt CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects eyes belonging to the IISOFIX system __ gt gt gt gt mM Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system 191 Locking eyes of the TOP TETHER system 192 eyes belonging to the IISOFIX system Fig 174 Rear seat ISOFIX B5E 0175 Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 191 Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the ISOFIX system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 191 There are two locking eyes between the seat backrest and the
178. e current operating state of your vehicle The information display also provides you with data de pending on the equipment installed in the vehicle relating to the Infotainment multi functional indicator etc Operating with the buttons on the operating lever Activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch A Fig 8 for longer Information system 2 7 Individual menu items can be selected by means of the rocker switch A When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed the information you have selected is dis played Operating the button adjustment wheel on the multifunction steering wheel Activate the Main menu by briefly pressing the rocker switch C Fig 8 The individual menus can be selected by pressing the adjustment wheel D The selected menu is displayed after briefly pressing the adjustment wheel D By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher Main menu points The following information can be selected depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle Driving data page 28 Wizard page 158 page 149 Navigation operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Navigation sys tem NAV button Audio operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Media MEDIA button Telephone operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Communication PHONE button Vehicle page 13 Auto check control Lap timer page 26 Menu item wizard In the menu i
179. e deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision re mains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the air bags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt Driver s front airbag gt Front passenger airbag gt Driver s knee airbag The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt Front side airbag on the side of the accident gt Rear side airbag on the side of the accident gt Head airbags on the side of the accident In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed gt the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt the hazard warning light is switched on gt all the doors are unlocked gt the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front airbags BP Driver s knee airbag 183 Side airbags 183 Head airbags __ CBS Airbagsystem 181 Front airbags o WARNING Correct seated position a For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 166 Not maintain ing this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able
180. e engine compartment Do not bend over the battery risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Keep any sources of ignition naked flame smouldering cigarettes etc away from the battery risk of explosion a Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns CAUTION a There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected a The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehi cle We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle Fig 201 Jump starting A flat battery B battery providing current First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 235 The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not start because the battery is flat Jump start cables are required for this purpose The jump start cables must be attached in the following sequence gt Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A Fig 201 gt Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach the clamp 4 to a solid metal part wh
181. e from KODA Original Accessories available from a KODA Partner a Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in a When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which re late to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed Front towing eye Fig 203 Front bumper Removing the cap installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 236 Removing installing the cap gt Press on the cap in the area A Fig 203 gt Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 gt After unscrewing the towing eye insert the area B of the cap under the right hand side of the hole in the front bumper and then press on the opposite side of the cap The cap must engage firmly Removing installing the towing eye gt Manually screw in the towing eye in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 203 until it stops For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt Unscrew the towing eye against the direction of the arrow 2 CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can
182. e icing door lock cylinders CAUTION When washing your vehicle ensure as little water as possible gets into the lock ing cylinders Cavity protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 194 All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory Wax protection does not require to be inspected or re treated If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner EJ warnine Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move wax risk of fire Wheels First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular ba Sis Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion otherwise the rim material will be cor roded Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to th
183. e luggage compartment lid is locked automatically can be extended by a specialist garage Delayed locking If the boot lid was locked with the symbol button lt on the remote control key then it is possible to open the lid within a limited period of it being closed There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked au tomatically Always lock the vehicle using the symbol button amp on the remote control or with the key if no remote control is available page 33 Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time hid Note More detailed information is available from your authorised SKODA Partner CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operating description 4 Acoustic signals 43 Adjusting deleting the top lid position 44 Malfunctions YS Force limiter The electric boot lid is fitted with a force limiter If the lid hits an obstacle when closing it stops and an audible signal sounds If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the boot lid the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid can be in terrupted Unlocking and opening 41 Manual operation Manually opening and closing the lid is only possible in exceptional cases and must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the centre of the lid as possible Handling the sides of the lid can damage the
184. e running lights and parking light Headlights with Xenon light 3 Xenon gas discharge bulbs 4 Daytime running and parking light Replacing the low beam bulb TORAO Halogen headlight Changing the bulb for the low beam 248 Do it yourself First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 gt Remove the rubber cover 1 Fig 218 on page 248 gt Turn the connector with the bulb in downwards in the direction of the arrow A Fig 219 and remove it in the direction of the arrow B gt Remove the connector gt Insert a new light bulb in such a way that the fixing lugs of the bulb fit in the recesses of the reflector gt Fit the connector gt Insert the rubber cover Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights Fig 220 Halogen headlight Replacing the bulb for main beam and sep arate daytime running lights B5E 0066 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 gt Remove the rubber cover 2 Fig 218 on page 248 gt Turn the bulb holder A Fig 220 anti clockwise up to the stop and remove gt Replace the bulb insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in a clock wise direction to the stop gt Insert the rubber cover Replacing bulb for daytime running lights and parking lights Fig 22i Headlights with Xenon light Changing the bulb for daytime running lights and parking l
185. e steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 197 Underbody protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechani cal influences It is not possible to guarantee that the protective coating will not suffer any damage as the vehicle is driven We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the chassis checked preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of winter EI WARNING Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature these substances might ignite risk of fire CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Natural leather 199 Artificial leather cloths and Alcantara 199 Seat covers 200 Seat belts 200 Regular and proper care helps to ensure efficiency and to maintain the value of your vehicle We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the package must be observed 198 General Maintenance EI WARNING a Vehicle care produ
186. e switched on the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period although the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system a The instruments are also illuminated when the side light low or high beam light is switched on The brightness of the instrument lighting can be activated deacti vated in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehi cle settings CAR button Lights and visibility 51 Side lights and low beam Fig 29 Light switch and control dial for the headlight beam range regu lation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 The light switch also controls the fog lights page 56 the rear fog light page 56 and the parking light page 58 The light switch A Fig 29or the control dial B is used to operate the following functions Switching on the parking light or parking lights on both sides z0 Switching on the low beam 0 Switching off lights except daytime running lights 20 Headlight beam adjustment Turning the rotary switch B from position to 3 gradually activates the head light beam adjustment thereby shortening the beam of light The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol lowing car load Front seats occupied luggage compartment empty 1 All seats occupied
187. e to the stop gt Re insert the holder and bulb into the lamp housing and turn clockwise to the Replacing bulbs in rear light Octavia stop Inner part of the light gt Unscrew the lamp holder Fig 227 A or B with the screwdriver from the car tool kit and remove the lamp holder from the tail light assembly gt Turn the bulb holder anti clockwise up to the stop and remove it from the lamp housing Fig 227 c or D gt Replace the bulb insert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop gt Insert the bulb holder in the tail lamp assembly gt Screw on the lamp holder carefully Fig 228 Inner part of the light Basic light light with LED diodes Fuses and light bulbs 251 Rear light Octavia Estate Fig 230 Installing the lamp connector lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 Removing gt Open the luggage compartment lid gt Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 228 Vehicle tool kit into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow Fig 229 A gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 229 A gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit Fig 229 to unscrew the lamp gt Grip the rear lamp assembly and carefully remove it by waggling it and pulling oppos
188. ebbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g specta cles ball point pens keys etc Such objects can cause injury EJ warninc Observe the following instructions for handling the seat belts is properly The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twisted or chafe against any sharp edges Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it Seat belts 175 EI warnine Observe the following instructions for the proper use of the seat belts a Never use one Seat belt to secure two people including children The seat belt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another pas senger a The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to pro tect and the risk of injury increases The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly a Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jacket do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts a It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the belts for smaller persons The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 73 FI WARNING Observe the following instruc
189. echnical alterations 200 replacing Vehicle battery 218 Replacing Bulb for daytime running lights and parking lights 249 Bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 248 268 Index Bulb for the fog lights Bulb for the licence plate light Bulb in rear light Octavia Estate Bulbs Bulbs in rear light Octavia Fuses Fuses engine compartment Fuses LHD Fuses RHD Low beam bulb Rear window wiper blade Windscreen wiper blades Replenishing Coolant Engine oil Windscreen washer fluid Revolutions counter 249 250 252 247 251 243 246 244 244 248 242 241 214 212 209 10 Roof luggage rack 99 Attachment points Roof rack system Roof load Running in the first 1500 km Running in Brake pads Engine Tyres S 98 100 125 126 125 126 35 Safe securing system Safety Child safety Child safety seats Correct seated position Head restraints 171 188 188 172 69 ISOFIX TOP TETHER Saving electrical energy Seals Taking care of your vehicle 191 192 126 195 Seat belt Warning icon 21 Warning light 16 Seat belt height adjuster 78 Seat belts 175 Belt tensioners 178 Cleaning 200 fastening and unfastening 177 Height adjustment 178 Seatbelts Inertia reels
190. ection not available PROACTIVE PASSENGER PROTECT NOT AVAIL or ProActive passenger protection funct restricted LIMITED PROACTIVE PASSENGER PROTECT EI warnine If there is a fault in the safety system have it checked immediately by a spe cialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the systems not being activated in the event of an accident D Tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light lights up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres page 220 An audible signal sounds as a warning signal If the warning light 4 flashes there is a fault in the system Seek help from a specialist garage Further information page 223 Tyre control display Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light U comes on after switching on the ignition If the warning light does not go out after moving a short distance this means there is an error in the system Seek help from a specialist garage Brake pad thickness First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the indicator light is lit the brake pads are worn The following message is shown in the information cluster display Check brake wear BRAKE PADS PLEASE CHECK Seek help from a specialist garag
191. ed 186 Safety Deactivating the front passenger airbag PASSENGER AIRBAG PASSENGER ON OFF AIR BAG O y a Fig 171 Key operated switch for the front passenger airbag warning light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 185 Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 171 OFF gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Check that the OFF 2 warning light in the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON OFF text 3 lights up after the ignition is switched on Switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 171 ON gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Check that the 0N warning light in the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON OFF text 3 lights up after the ignition is switched on The 0N warning light goes out 65 seconds after the key switch status has changed or after the ignition is switched on EJ WARNING a The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Otherwise a fault can occur in the syste
192. ed or used If the seat belt is not fastened properly this may result in injuries during an acci dent caused by the deployed airbag Before setting off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off gt Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly gt Check the tyre inflation pressure gt Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside Passive Safety 171 gt Secure all items of luggage page 85 Luggage compartment gt Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals gt Adjust the mirrors the front seat and head restraint to your body size gt Advise your passengers to adjust the head restraints to their body size gt Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 188 Transporting children safely gt Adopt the correct seated position page 172 Correct seated position Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position gt Correctly fasten the seat belt Also inform passengers to fasten the seat belt correctly page 175 Using seat belts What influences driving safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your d
193. ed without any extra messages for the driver Symbol A Warning A Danger FJ warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 57 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescri bed distance observe the national legal provisions when doing so Instruments and warning lights 13 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects i Automatic gearbox __ gt gt M Handbrake 15 Braking system 15 A Seat belt warning light front _ sd Power steering 16 amp Traction Control System ASR 16 amp Traction control system TCS off _ A amp Electronic Stability Control ESC 17 Antilock brake system ABS 17 Q Rearfoglight ST Exhaust inspection system 17 ov Glow plug system diesel engine 18 EPC Engine performance check petrol engine CC B8 2r Safety Systems 18 U Tyre inflation pressure 18 Brake pad thickness gt B Lane following system Lane Assist 19 lt a gt Turn signal system 19 Trailer turn signallights SD 0 Fog lights 19 Cruise control system 19 Selector lever lock 20 D Main beam 20 y lt gt Automatic gearbox First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14
194. eheating fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of 25 C Fuel additives Fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar products must not be added to the diesel fuel CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the stand ard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and exhaust sys tem a Damage caused by using diesel fuel which does not comply with the standards are excluded from the warranty a f a different fuel other than diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned Standards e g petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Extensive damage to engine parts can occur We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults a Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system Comply with the proscribed oil change intervals CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening and closing the bonnet 208 Engine compartment overview 209 Radiator fan 209 Windscreen washer system 209 EJ warnine When working in the
195. elayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be faulty Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriate ly as you will not know the exact extent of the damage Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 15 Braking system Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running 120 Driving Handbrake Fig 119 Centre console Handbrake B5E 0147 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Loosening gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking button Fig 119 gt Move the lever right down
196. eleration process can be stopped any time by applying the brake or press ing the button CANCEL on the operating lever Fig 139 on page 146 Vehicles with special load or special body parts Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides back or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC Control should therefore be disabled whenever you are driving behind or overtak ing such a vehicle Towing a trailer When towing a trailer the ACC control will be less powerful The manner of driv ing should therefore be adapted to this limitation Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 143 If the symbol lappears in the instrument cluster display when ACC is enabled it means that the ACC is not working The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display ACC No sensor visibility The sensor is dirty or has no visibility Stop the car switch off the engine and clean the sensor or remove the obstacle causing the lack of visibility Fig 136 on page 144 Should the ACC still be unavailable after the engine is restarted push the lever into position OFF Fig 139 on page 146 Seek help from a specialist garage ACCis not available Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and then start it again If the ACC is still not available push the lever into position OFF Seek help from a speciali
197. elt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel F WARNING a The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning a Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liq uids e g acids a Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the belt webbing seat belt connections inertia reel or lock is detected the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage a The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects SKODA Service Partners 201 Spoiler 20 Component protection 202 Airbags 202 The instructions and guidelines from SKODA AUTO a s must be observed when carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition After carrying out modifications repairs or technical alterations the vehicle will comply with German road trans port regulations StVZO Always consult a KODA Partner page 201before buying accessories or parts or before carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your ve hicle FJ warninec f work on your vehicle is not carried out properly this can lead to operat
198. emoving the net partition housing d First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 96 Removing gt Fold the rear seats forward page 73 gt Open the rear right door page 37 gt Push the net partition housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 105 Install gt Insert the recesses on the net partition housing into the mounts on the rear seat backrests gt Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 Fig 105 as far as the stop gt Fold the rear seats back into their original positions page 73 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 99 Roofload S00 EJ WARNING a The items which you transport on the roof rack must be reliably attached risk of accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps a Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on the roof rack system the handling of the car may change as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres a Adjust the speed and driving style to the v
199. ems Front Assist 149 Assist system ABS 133 Assist systems 132 ABS 17 Adaptive cruise control 143 ASR 16 Cruise Control System 141 Driving mode 156 DSR 134 EDL 134 ESC 17 132 HBA 134 Headlight assist 55 HHC 134 Lane Assist 158 Park assist 137 Parking aid 135 ProActive passenger protection 158 START STOP 153 TCS 133 XDS 134 Auto check control 13 Automatic driving lamp control 53 Automatic gearbox Selector lever emergency unlocking 241 Starting off and driving 124 Tiptronic 123 Warning light 14 Automatic load deactivation 219 Automatic transmission 121 Kickdown 124 Malfunction 125 Selector lever lock 123 Using the selector lever 122 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion 110 Adjust 111 Radio remote control 111 Switching on off 111 Avoiding damage to the vehicle Driving through water 130 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 130 B Ball head Check fitting 166 Ball rod installing Ready position removing Battery In the remote control key Replacing in the auxiliary heater remote control Belts Belt tensioners Bonnet Closing Opening Boot lid Automatic locking 165 165 166 238 239 175 178 208 208 4 Brake booster Brake fluid Changing Checking Brake pads Warning light 120 214 215 214 19 Brakes Brake assist systems Brake booster Br
200. en any of the following conditions are true gt The tyre inflation pressure is low gt The structure of the tyre is damaged gt The vehicle is loaded on one side Wheels 223 gt The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt Snow chains are mounted gt The spare wheel is mounted gt One wheel per axle was changed For vehicles with the Infotainment it can be determined which tires should be checked Manual Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings key CAR EI warnine When the warning light illuminates immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure a Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the may light up after a delay or not at all CAUTION a The tyre control display does therefore not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control as the system cannot detect an even loss of pressure a The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss e g in case of sudden tyre damage In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking a To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display it is necessary to re peat the basic setting every 10000 km or once a year Spare wheel Fig 191 L
201. en must be fastened page 188 Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system At all times the front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to match the person s body size and the seat belt must be attached properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to passengers Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects e g child safety seat provided for this purpose risk of accident CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manually adjusting the front seats 68 Electric front seat adjustment 68 m WARNING Head restraints 69 Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat 70 As the driver observe the following instructions Memory function of the remote control key 70 Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of accident a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and a dis tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as these may get caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking page 121 You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals ca
202. en with difficulty by other road users a Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb a Gas discharge bulbs xenon bulbs operate with a high voltage professional knowledge is required risk of death a The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is re placed CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth napkin or sim ilar a This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage a We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi cle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories a We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage af ter replacing a bulb in the main beam low beam or fog lights a Gas discharge bulbs and LED diodes are replaced by a specialist garage Fuses and light bulbs 247 Headlights Fig 218 Bulb arrangement Headlight with halogen bulb with Xenon bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 Headlight with halogen bulb 1 Low beam 2 Main beam separate daytim
203. ensor Fig 142 Mounting location of the radar sensor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 The radar sensor Fig 142 From here on referred to as sensor is used to assess the traffic situation in front of the vehicle The sensor can distinguish objects by radiating and receiving electromagnetic waves The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following gt The sensor is covered by mud snow or debris for example gt The sensor or its immediate surroundings are covered by other objects for ex ample a sticker is attached gt When visibility is poor e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall If the sensor is dirty or does not have visibility for any other reason the follow ing message appears in the instrument cluster display Front Assist No sensor view Stop the car switch off the engine and clean the sensor or eliminate the obstacle causing the lack of visibility Should Front Assist still be unavailable after the en gine is restarted consult a specialist garage for help FJ warnine a If you suspect that the sensor is damaged deactivate Front Assist Have the sensor checked by a specialist garage The sensor can become misaligned by collisions or by damage to the front of the vehicle the wheel arch or the underside of the vehicle This can lead to impaired function of the Front Assist function risk of accidents If this
204. ent in the opposite direction to the previous movement Lid operation with the handle A The operation of the lid using the handle A is only possible when the vehicle is unlocked Lid operation with the button Operating the lid with the button B is only possible when the lid is open Lid operation with the symbol button lt on the remote control key and the button Action When the ignition is switched on the operation of the lid does not function using the remote control key Operating the lid with the button C does not work if the vehicle was locked from the outside Operating the lid with the symbol button lt gt on the remote control key and the button C does not work when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle Acoustic signals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 The acoustic signals serve as a safety function and provide information about the success of a performed action Signals Status Opening with the button lt on the remote control key or with the button C Fig 23 on page 42 Interrupted tone Automatic closing of the lid page 42 H in section In troduction 1 continuous tone Force limiter Confirmation of the storage of the lid position 3 rising tones 3 identical tones fault Unlocking and opening 43 Adjusting deleting the
205. ently risk of injury l CAUTION Do not place any sharp objects into the net risk of net damage Luggage compartment cover Fig 87 Luggage compartment cover stowed behind the rear seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 Removing gt Unhook the support straps 1 Fig 86 gt On the underside of the cover in the area between the holders press 2 gt Remove the cover The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest Fig 87 Install gt Place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel gt The mounts of the cover 3 Fig 86 must be positioned above the holders 2 of the side trim panel gt Press on the upper side of the cover so that the mounts fully interlock in the holders gt Hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid Seats and useful equipment 89 EI warnine No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle col lides with something CAUTION a Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area a When closing the boot lid jamming and damage to the luggage compartment cover or the side trim panel can occur if handled in an unprofessional way The following guidelines must be observed The mounts of the cover 3 Fig 86 mus
206. er use a mild soap sol ution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Fabric Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors luggage compartment cover etc using specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and a specific cleaning agent to clean the roof trim Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush Remove stubborn hair using a cleaning glove Alcantara Dust and fine dirt particles in pores creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the Al cantara seat covers from the direct rays of the sun to prevent fading Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 199 Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal CAUTION a Do not use any leather cleaners on Alcantara seat covers a For Alcantara seat covers do not use any solvents floor wax shoe cream stain remover leather cleaners or similar agents a Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order to stop the fabric from bleaching If the vehicle is parked outside for long periods of time cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight a Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correct
207. er a cover A Fig 205 We recommend having the key batteries replaced by a specialist garage Howev er if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as follows gt Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of the arrows 1 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in the region of the arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery gt Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place cid Note The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 239 a f a key has an affixed decorative cover this will be destroyed when the battery is replaced A replacement cover can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Synchronising the remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 238 If the vehicle does not unlock when pressing the remote control the key may not be synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the remote control key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery in the remote control key was replaced Synchronise the key as follows gt Press any button on the remote control key gt Pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 mi nute Repl
208. er load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces page 254 Technical data The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1000 metres above mean sea level Towing a trailer 167 The engine output falls as the height increases as does the ability to climb Therefore for every additional 1000 m in height or part the maximum permissi ble towed weight must be reduced by 10 The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device are merely test data for the towing device The vehicle specific values are de tailed in the vehicle documents EI WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum permissible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer risk of accident and serious injury Slipping loads can significantly impair the stability and safety of the vehicle trailer combination risk of accident and serious injury Driving with a trailer m lt Swivel out the 13 pin power socket y lt B5E 0230 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 gt Before hitching the trailer to the vehicle hold on to the 13 pin power socket in the area A Fig 158 and swivel it out in the direction of the arrow gt Remove the protective cap 5 Fig 153 on page 164 upwards
209. er s door The steering is unlocked within 2 seconds Locking gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button Fig 117 gt Open the driver door The steering is locked If the driver s door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards the steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked If the steering is locked and the KESSY system does not manage to unlock the steering lock the first time e g if the wheels are resting against the curb the at tempt will be repeated twice by the system If the steering lock is then not unlocked the following information is shown in the instrument cluster display Move the steering wheel MOVE STEERING WHEEL Slightly move the steering and the system will complete 3 more attempts to un lock after 2 seconds At the same time the indicator light flashes Eliminate the possible cause which is preventing the unlocking and then repeat the attempt to unlock the steering Starting off and Driving 117 Switching on the ignition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 The steering must be unlocked to switch on the ignition gt Briefly press the starter button Fig 117 on page 117 and the ignition is switch ed on If the ignition is switched on and the driver s door is opened the following mes Sage appears in the instrument cluster display Ignition on
210. er s lock in the unlock position gt Hold the button A in the opening position Fig 24 on page 45 Closing gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the remote control key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt Hold the button A in the closing position Fig 24 on page 45 gt In the KESSY system hold a finger on the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 35 You can interrupt the opening or closing process for the windows immediately by releasing the key or the the button A and interrupting the locking unlocking The convenience opening of the windows by means of the key in the driver s front passenger s lock is only possible within 45 seconds of deactivating or acti vating the alarm system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 44 The automatic power windows do not work if the vehicle battery was disconnec ted and connected while a window is open The system must be activated Activation sequence gt Switch on the ignition gt Pull the top edge of the button and close the window gt Release the button gt Pull the relevant button upwards again for approx 3 seconds and keep it press ed down This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 47 Convenience operation of Sliding tilting roof 48 1 Convenience opening and closing the windows with the button A is possible immediately after un
211. er switch Fig 123 briefly towards the steering wheel Temporarily switching to manual shifting in position D S gt Pull one the rocker switches briefly towards the steering wheel Fig 123 If you do not pull one of the rocker switches for more than 1 Minute manual shifting of gears is deactivated You can also deactivate the temporary switch to manual shifting by pulling the right rocker switch towards the steering wheel for more than 1 second Starting off and Driving 123 When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selected the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving Note It may be beneficial for example when travelling downhill to use manual shifting of gears Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence the wear of the brakes page 119 Starting off and driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 Starting off gt Start the engine gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal gt Press and hold the lock button Fig 122 on page 122 gt Move the selector lever into the desired position page 122 and then release the lock button gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate Stop gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop
212. errupted e g dis charged vehicle battery blown fuse the selector lever can no longer be moved out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be moved The selector lever must be unlocked specially page 241 i Note If the transmission has switched to emergency mode visit a specialist garage CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects New engine _ gt YO New tyres 126 New brake pads 126 New engine AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 125 The engine has to be run in during the first 1500 kilometres Up to 1000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed permissible for the engaged gear gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1500 kilometres Gradually increase the speed until you reach the full speed of the engaged gear The red scale of the rev counter indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of run ning in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in period is complete On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox at the very
213. ers changes This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers a The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed a The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C a Keep the wiper blades clean They may become soiled e g with wax residues after washing in automatic car wash systems page 193 Windscreen wipers and washers Fig 43 Operating lever Function of the the windscreen wipers and washers First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 62 Function of the windscreen wipers and washers in the individual posi tions Fig 43 Wipers off Periodic windscreen wiping automatic wiping in rain slow windscreen wiping rapid windscreen wiping Flick windscreen wiping spring tensioned position Automatic wipe wash for windscreen spring tensioned position Wiping the rear window pane the windscreen wiper wipes every 6 seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window spring tensioned position Switches for setting the required break between the individual wiper strokes 1 periodic windscreen wiping or the wiper speed in rain 1 automatic windscreen wiping in rain ESS ES GO Automatic windscreen wiping in rain Automatic windscreen wiping in rain can be activated deactivated in the Infotain ment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter
214. erve the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 gt Briefly press the starter button Fig 117 on page 117 and the ignition is switch ed off The ignition can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km h On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox the clutch pedal must not be de pressed after switching off the ignition otherwise the system would try to start On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox the selector lever must be in the position P or N and the brake pedal must not be depressed otherwise the system would try to start Switching off the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine by pressing the starter button Fig 117 on page 117 doing so switches off the ignition at the same time Emergency start up of the engine Fig 118 Emergency start up of engine Qi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 If the authorisation check for the key fails the following message appears in the instrument cluster display Key not found NOKEY The emergency start up must be completed gt Press the starter button Fig 118 and then hold the key to the starter button Or gt Press the starter button directly with the key During an emergency start up of the engine the key bit must face the starter button Fig 118
215. erwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system first of all dis connect the negative terminal of the battery followed by the positive terminal a When connecting the battery to the electrical system first of all connect the positive terminal of the battery followed by the negative terminal Under no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a ca ble fire a Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork risk of damage to the paintwork a Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by discon necting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a f the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge SA For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations Note You should repla
216. essary Include the protective cap when stowing away the ball rod to protect the boot from getting contaminated In the event of dirt clean the surfaces of the mounting recess and treat with a suitable preservative CAUTION Apply lubricating grease to the upper part of the mounting recess Make sure you do not remove any grease CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Loading a trailer S SSS _ O7 Driving with a trailer 168 Trailer stabilisation 169 Anti theft alarm system _ SB EJ wARNING Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer Loading a trailer First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum permis sible drawbar load must be utilised If the drawbar load is too low it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trail er is laden Drive at a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 221 Service life of tyres Trailer load The permissible trail
217. ests Fig 57 Seat backrest Locking unlocking Fig 58 Luggage compartment Folding the rear seat backrest forward Oc tavia Estate Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 71 The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests forward The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats Seats and useful equipment 73 Folding forward Before folding the seat backrests forwards adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests gt Push the lever A Fig 57 and fold the seat backrest completely forwards Fold forward from the luggage compartment There is a lever on the right side of the luggage compartment for folding the right and the middle rear seat forward There is a lever on the left side of the luggage compartment for folding the left rear seat forward gt Pull the corresponding lever in the direction of the arrow Fig 58 The corresponding seat backrest is folded forward Folding backwards gt Hold the rear outer seat belt C Fig 57 against the side trim panel gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob A clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest M gt Make sure that the red pin B is hidden FJ WARNING The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position afte
218. euvres Note The trailer stabilisation works for both braked and unbraked trailers Anti theft alarm system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 If the vehicle is locked the alarm is activated when the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted Always switch off the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or uncou pled page 39 Conditions for including a trailer in the anti theft alarm system J The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and a towing de vice JV The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket Towing atrailer 169 v The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional JV the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti theft alarm system is activated Note For technical reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the an ti theft alarm system 170 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Safety equipment __ TT Before setting off 171 What influences driving safety 172 In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for exam ple regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children EJ WwARNING a This chapter
219. f the dash panel Replacing fuses gt Open the storage compartment page 75 gt Grab hold of the storage compartment in the area of the arrows Fig 213 gt Fold out the storage compartment by pulling in the direction of arrow 1 gt Replace the appropriate fuse gt Fold back the storage compartment by pressing into the secured position in the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Close the storage compartment Fuses in the dash panel RHD Fig 214 Storage compartment on the front passenger s side RHD 244 Do it yourself First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 243 On right hand drive vehicles the fuse box is located on the front passenger s side behind the storage compartment in the left hand section of the dash panel Removing the storage compartment and replacing the fuse gt Insert a screwdriver under the side cover Fig 214 gt Unlock the cover in the direction of the arrow 1 gt Push the cover out in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Open the storage compartment gt Unlock the brake rod of the storage compartment in the direction of the arrow 3 with the screwdriver gt Remove the storage compartment in the direction of the arrow 4 gt Replace the appropriate fuse page 245 Installing the storage compartment gt Pull in the storage compartment behind the brackets A Fig 214 gt Push in the storage compartmen
220. fire in the vehicle a When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is impor tant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA service partners are fa miliar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed infor mation Seat belts 179 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects System description 180 Airbag deployment 180 E WARNING An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a fas tened seat belt a The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size page 172 Correct seated position f you do not fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident EI WARNING Observe the following instructions for handling the airbag system a f there is a fault the airbag system must be checked by a specialist garage immediately Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system a Any work on the airbag system including the installation and remov
221. for the screw in towing eye behind the cap Use the built in detachable ball rod for towing page 164 Towing device Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to us ing the towing eye If the towing device is removed completely it must be replaced with the standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the towing eye If this procedure is not observed the vehicle may not meet the national legal pro visions CAUTION The detachable ball rod and or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used Ete Note The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing if necessary 238 Do it yourself CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the battery in the remote controlkey 238 Synchronising the remote control 239 Replacing the battery in the auxiliary heater remote control 239 CAUTION The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery a When replacing the battery pay attention to the correct polarity SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 205 Remove cover take out battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 238 The battery is located und
222. fuel consumption It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte rior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to al low the heated air to escape If the windows are open the cooling system should not be on while driving SA For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also reduced when fuel is saved page 126 Economical driving and environmental sustainability m J i NEA rationa First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 245 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the Fig 109 Heating Control elements coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 11 L B5E 0089 If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself or if the cooler output has reduced switch off the cooling system and seek assistance from a specialist garage Functions of the individual controls Fig 109 A Set the temperature turn to the left Turn to the right to reduce the temper ature increase temperature Set the blower stage stage O Blower off stage 6 the highest blower stage Set the direction of the air outlet page 1
223. g 27 gt Press the switch on the recess E down and then pull it forwards Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter The sliding tilting roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because there is something in the way e g ice The sliding tilting roof can be fully closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess E down and then pushing it forward until the sliding tilting roof is fully closed E FJ warninc When closing the sliding tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries risk of injury CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism Opening closing the sun screen Fig 28 Buttons for sun screen 4 B5E 0195 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 48 The sun screen can be closed or opened using the buttons Fig 28 Unlocking andopening 49 Opening gt Briefly press the button F Fig 28 to open fully gt Press and hold the button F to open to the desired position The opening process stops when one releases the button Closing gt Briefly press the button G Fig 28 to close fully gt Press and hold the button F to close in the desired position The closing process stops when one releases the butt
224. g 41 The sun visors each have a vanity mirror B with a cover Push the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 Lights and visibility 61 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen wipers and washers 63 Headlight cleaning system 64 The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed If the intermittent wipe is switched on the intervals are also controlled depend ing on speed When automatic wiping in rain is active the wiper intervals are regulated based on the intensity of the rain The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected Automatic rear window wiping can be activated deactivated in the Infotain ment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 209 EI warnine a Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving page 241 a Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front a Automatic wiping in rain only operates as a support The driver is not re leased from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditio
225. g eye 237 Vehicles with a tow hitch 238 Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the automatic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available The following guidelines must be observed 236 Do it yourself Driver of the tow vehicle gt Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelera tor particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt On vehicles with a manual transmission only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not blocked and so that the turn signal lights horn windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be used gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the ve hicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the en gine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is re quired to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a
226. g subjects Activating deactivating 142 Storing and maintaining speed gt gt R Changing the stored speed 142 Switching off temporarily 142 Information on the display 143 The Cruise Control System CCS maintains a set speed more than 25 km h with out you having to actuate the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is switched on F WARNING For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel risk of accident The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent uninten tional switching on of the system CAUTION a The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with very steep gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels In such cases a lower gear should be engaged or the foot brake applied a It is not possible to switch on the cruise control system if the first gear or re verse gear is engaged Vehicles fitted with a manual transmission Assist systems 141 a It is not possible to switch on the cruise control system if the selector
227. garette lighter Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted 8 Central locking system amp START STOP ASR Traction control TCS amp Electronic Stability Control ESC ex Selection of driving mode Pe Park Assist Pm Parking aid Tyre inflation pressure calibration Depending on equipment fitted gt USB AUX input Infotainment Manual chapter USB AUX In puts gt MEDIA IN input Infotainment Manual chapter MEDIA IN input VvvVVV VV Vv Vv Cockpit 186 37 46 52 75 244 208 146 114 T15 121 120 121 122 103 105 107 79 78 36 153 133 132 156 137 135 223 Note The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items on right hand drive models may differ from that shown in Fig 1 The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models 8 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview 9 Revolutions counter 10 Display 10 Speedometer 10 Coolant temperature gauge TI Fuel gauge TI Counter for distance driven 12 Setting the time 12 Viewing the charge level vehicle battery 12 Service interval display 12 Auto check control 13 Component protection If the message SAFE CP appears in the instrument cluster display the component protection for the instrument cluster is a
228. ge Warning light Error Gearbox No reverse gear possible GEARBOX ERROR REV_GEAR NOT AVAIL Meaning and Action Fault with automatic gearbox reverse gear cannot be engaged Consult a specialist garage for help Error Gearbox GEARBOX ERROR Fault with automatic gearbox Consult a specialist garage for help Gearbox overheated GEARBOX OVERHEATED rage The temperature of the automatic gearbox clutches is too high Do not drive on Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the warning light 3 goes off risk of gearbox damage Once the light goes off you may continue your journey If the warning light does not go off do not continue driving Seek help from a specialist ga Gearbox overheated Stop Log book STOP VEHICLE GEARBOX OVERHEAT rage The temperature of the automatic gearbox clutches is too high Do not drive on Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the warning light goes off risk of gearbox damage If the warning light does not go off do not continue driving Seek help from a specialist ga Gearbox faulty Workshop GEARBOX FAULTY WORKSHOP Handbrake First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light comes on if the handbrake is applied An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km h while the handbrake is still on The following message is shown in the info
229. ge 200 The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front bump er doors front seats roof lining or body 202 General Maintenance EI warnine Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Modifications repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults and can also seri ously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal injury a The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed Airbag modules cannot be repaired EI warnine Observe the following instructions for handling the airbag system a t is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed a Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled a Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle The airbags may then not be triggered properly or not at all in the event of an accident a No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system EI warnine a A change to the vehicle s wheel suspension including the use of non ap proved wheels and tire combinations can alter the functioning of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal i
230. ght to increase or decrease the temperature The warning light in the symbol button DUAL lights up If the warning light in the symbol button DUAL is lit the temperature for both sides cannot be set with the control dial A This function can be resumed by pressing the symbol button DUAL The warning light in the button goes out The interior temperature can be set between 16 C and 29 C The interior tem perature is regulated automatically within this range If a temperature lower than 16 C is selected a blue symbol lights up on the cor responding control dial If a temperature higher than 29 C is selected a red symbol lights up on the cor responding control dial At both end positions Climatronic runs at maximum cooling heating output and the temperature is automatically not regulated CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Automatic recirculated air mode mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing ina traffic jam If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the air quality sensor recirculated air m
231. gnal on the driver s side if you wish to park on this side of the road The search area for the parking space on the driver s side is shown in the instrument cluster display If suitable parking space is found its parameters are stored until another suitable parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven after finding the parking space If the driver changes the parking mode while searching for a parking space the symbol button Pe must be pressed again Parking SS lt 1 YA a wa 7 z 16 5 c Fig 133 Displays in the instrument cluster display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 137 The time limit for the parking procedure with the help of the system is 6 minutes If the system has recognised a suitable parking space this parking space is shown in the display Fig 133 A gt Continue driving forwards until the display Fig 133 Blappears in the display gt Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until the parking procedure starts gt Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever into the position R gt As soon as the following message is shown in the information cluster display Steering int active Check around veh let go of the steering wheel and the steering is taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully
232. ground page 231 gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench alternat ing crosswise Tighten the anti theft wheel bolt last page 231 gt Replace the wheel trim or the caps FI WARNING a All bolts must be clean and must turn easily a Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts a When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the direction of rotation is cor rect page 220 230 Do it yourself Follow up tasks First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 229 The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special screw page 224 gt Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible gt Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair options E WARNING a f it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing the wheel the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque a Drive cautiously and only at
233. h are particularly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the engine has Started whereby high engine speeds should be avoided Avoiding short distances 1 100km Fig 126 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start Fuel consump tion drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating tempera ture An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The im age Fig 126 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a cer tain distance at a temperature of 20 C and a temperature of 10 C The vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in winter than in summer Convenience consumers First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 The convenience consumers have a share in fuel consumption We recommend you keep these consumers on only for as long as necessary 128 Driving The convenience consumers include gt The air conditioning system gt Rear window heater gt Windscreen heater
234. h a mild soap solution and clean warm water Never use harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents as this could damage the films The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner gt The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be 50 cm gt Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface gt The maximum water temperature is 50 C gt The maximum water pressure is 80 bar CAUTION In the winter months do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from the areas with films Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of snow or ice risk of film damage 196 General Maintenance De icing windows and exterior mirrors Fig 176 Fuel filler flap Ice scraper B5E 0173 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors The ice scraper can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Open the fuel filler flap gt Slide out the ice scraper in the direction of the arrow Fig 176 Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dir
235. handle door opening lever outside inside First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 Opening from the outside gt Unlock the vehicle and pull the handle on the door handle A Fig 18 Opening from the inside gt Pull the handle on the door opening lever B Closing from the inside gt Grab the pull handle C and close the door FJ warninec Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly while driving risk of death Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening closing range risk of injury An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the vehi cle is on an incline risk of injury Unlocking and opening 37 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information message 8B Parking vehicle 38 Information message Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 Key in the vehicle The protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle unlocks the vehicle automatically if the following conditions are met v The vehicle including the boot lit has been locked v The key with which the vehicle has been locked remained in the vehicle in the area D Fig 15 on page 35 The turn signal lights flash four times as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked again The following message is shown in the infor
236. he Infotain ment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Winter setting of the windscreen wiper If the windscreen wipers are in rest position they cannot be folded out from the windscreen For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily gt Switch on the windscreen wipers gt Switch off the ignition The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when switching off the ignition The service position can also be used as a winter position page 241 Note If the slow or the fast wiper setting is switched on and the vehicle speed decrea ses to below 4 km h the wiper speed is incrementally set to a lower wiper speed The original setting is restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle ex ceeds 8 km h Lights and visibility 63 Headlight cleaning system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 62 The headlights will be cleaned once the ignition is on and always upon the first and after every tenth spraying of the windscreen when the low beam is switched on Every time the windscreen is cleaned represents the tenth time each headlight is sprayed To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray CA
237. he brake assist systems operate correctly Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis can influence the functionality of the brake assist systems page 200 Ee Note If a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC ASR and EDL also do not work An ABS fault is indicated with the warning light page 17 132 Driving Electronic Stability Control ESC Fig 128 ESC button B5E 0149 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 The ESC system helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it is being operated at its dynamic limits such as a sudden change to the direction of travel The risk of skidding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving sta bility depending on the conditions of the road surface The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle If differences exist such as the car beginning to skid the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel During an intervention of the system the warning light 2 flashes in the instru ment cluster The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control ESC gt Antilock Brake System ABS page 133 gt Traction control TCS page
238. he cap on the mounting recess Check proper fitting Fig 156 Check the proper attachment of the ball rod First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 164 Before each use of the ball rod check that it is attached properly Check the following points V The lever 1 is at the top Fig 156 The trigger pin 2 is completely exposed both its red and green part is visi ble v The key is removed the cap 3 is on top of the lock of the operating lever J The ball rod does not come off the mounting recess even after strong shak L ing E WARNING Do not use the towing device unless the ball rod was properly locked 166 Driving Removing the ball rod Fig 157 Unlock the operating lever of the ball rod removing the ball rod First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 164 gt Remove the cap 1 Fig 157 from the lock on the ball rod in the direction of the arrow gt Unlock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key 2 180 to the left so that the red marking becomes visible gt Grab hold of the ball rod from underneath gt Press the trigger pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow The ball rod is released in this position and falls freely into the hand If it does not fall freely int
239. he coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive This mix ture guarantees antifreeze protection protects the cooling heater system against corrosion and prevents the formation of scale Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 25 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40 Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons the amount of coolant additive can only be increased up to a maximum of 60 antifreeze protection down to approx 40 C When refilling only use the same antifreeze written on the antifreeze expansion tank Fig 184 on page 213 EJ WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 206 Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the coolant under the prevailing conditions Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage CAUTION a The amount of coolant additive in the coolant must never be allowed to be less than 40 O
240. he following components gt Passengers gt All items of luggage and other loads gt Roof load including roof rack system gt Equipment not included in the operating weight gt Trailer hook weight when towing up to 75 kg and 80 kg for the Octavia Combi 4x4 vehicles Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine Afterwards standard urban driving is simulated In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km h The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra urban cycle EJ warnine Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights risk of accident and damage Note a f required you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist ga rage Depending on the range of equipment style of driving traffic situation weather influences and vehicle condition consumption values may deviate from the indi cated values Technical data 255 Dimensions Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 254 Dimensions mm OCTAVIA OCTAVIA RS OCTAVIA ES TATE OCTAVIA ES TATE MG6 OCTAVIA ES TATE MG6 Length 4659 4685 4659 4685
241. he handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decou pling the trailer Trailer stabilisation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 167 The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works in conjunction with the counter steering assistance to reduce the amount the trail er sways After turning on the ignition the ESC warning light amp in the instrument cluster lights up for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS warning light Function requirements for trailer stabilisation V The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the KODA genu ine accessories J The ESC system is active The warning light amp is lit up in the instrument clus ter or not J The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket JV The speed is higher than approx 60 km h vV The trailer has a rigid drawbar EJ warninec The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise CAUTION a The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving situa tions a Trailers that sway slightly may not always be detected by the trailer stabilisa tion and are thus not stabilised accordingly a Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regulated a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking mano
242. he handle of the boot lid gt Unlock the vehicle using the symbol button amp on the remote control key gt Unlocking the driver s door in an emergency page 240 Activation after 90 hours gt Unlock the vehicle using the symbol button amp on the remote control key gt Unlocking the driver s door in an emergency page 240 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating deactivating 8D Interior monitor and towing protection 40 The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle hereafter referred to only as alarm An alarm is triggered when the following monitored areas of the vehicle have a fault gt Bonnet gt Boot lid gt Doors gt Ignition lock gt Vehicle inclination page 40 gt Interior of car page 40 gt Adrop in voltage of the on board power supply gt Socket of the factory fitted towing device page 168 Driving with a trailer An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the anti theft alarm system is activated The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle or switching on the ignition CAUTION Before leaving the vehicle it must be checked that all of the windows doors and the sliding tilting roof are locked
243. he head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head C Fig 159 on page 173 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 175 Using seat belts gt Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 188 Transporting children safely Examples of an incorrect seated position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 172 The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if your seat belts are fastened correctly Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains instructions which if not observed may cause serious injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiar ise yourself with this subject Observe the following instructions while driving gt Do not stand up gt Do not stand on the seats gt Do not knee on the seats gt Do not tilt the seat backrest too much to the back gt Do not lean against the dash panel gt Do not lie on the rear seat bench gt Do not sit only on the front area of the seat gt
244. he introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 HHC allows you when driving on slopes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back The HHC is active as of a5 slope if the driver door is closed HHC is always ac tive on slopes when in forward or reverse Start off When driving downhill it is in active Multicollision brake First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 132 The multifunction brake deploys automatic braking after a collision in order to re duce the risk of further collisions Automatic braking can only be deployed at speeds of over 10 km h in the event of a frontal or sideimpact The vehicle is slowed down automatically by the ESC system as long as the brakes the ESC and the relevant electrical system remain operational after the impact Automatic braking is not applied if the driver presses the accelerator during the accident CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 136 Automatic system activation when moving forward 137 Road display 137 F warnine
245. hen riding on a steep gradient high slope CAUTION a It is not possible to switch on the control on vehicles fitted with a manual transmission if the first gear or reverse gear is engaged a t is not possible to switch on the control on vehicles fitted with an automatic transmission if the selector lever is in the position P N or R a The control may automatically switch off when some brake assist systems e g ESC intervene when the maximum permissible engine speed is exceeded etc Note The speed can only be set and stored when ACC is activated The stored speed may differ from the actual speed if a proximity control procedure is in progress at the time a Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and start again using the ACC a The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by means of a braking procedure as appropriate If the brakes are used for an auto matic speed reduction at any moments then the brake light illuminates a In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri cally connected trailer the ACC becomes unavailable 144 Driving Radar sensor Fig 136 Mounting location of the radar sensor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 The radar sensor Fig 136 From here on referred to as sensor is used to assess the traffic situation in front of the vehicle The
246. hicle is being driven to a greater extent When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers In order to avoid this the headlights must be adjusted at a specialist ga rage Starting off and Driving 131 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic Stability Control ESC 132 Antilock Braking System ABS 133 Traction Control System TCS 133 Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS 134 Driver Steer Recommendation DSR 134 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 134 Hill Hold Control HHC 134 Multicollision brake 135 FE WARNING a A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then fail to function risk of accident a Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety offered by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of accident a In the event of an ABS fault visit a specialist garage immediately Adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the damage is and the limitation it is placing on the braking effi ciency CAUTION All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufactur er to ensure t
247. ht sensor attached be tween the windscreen and the interior mirror page 53 The function switches on the parking and low beam lights the entry lighting in the exterior mirrors and the licence plate light COMING HOME The light turns on automatically when you open the driver s door The light turns off after the preset time when you close all the doors and the boot lid If a door or the boot lid remains open the light goes out after 60 seconds LEAVING HOME The light turns on automatically after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control The light turns off after a preset time or after the vehicle is locked CAUTION Do not affix any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the wind screen so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled T Note If this function is activated constantly the battery will be heavily discharged par ticularly in short haul traffic Hazard warning light system Fig 34 Button for hazard warning light system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 Switching on off gt Press the button A Fig 34 All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The warning light for the turn signals and the warning light in the button also flash at the same time The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off
248. ible to fit snow chains with the following wheel tyre combinations Wheel size 6J x 15 Depth D 43 mm 48 mm 48 mm Tyre size 195 65 R15 205 55 R16 205 50 R17 6J x 16 6J x 17 a Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 13 mm b Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains CAUTION The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed Do it yourself CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects First aid kit and warning triangle 227 Fire extinguisher 228 Vehicle tool kit 228 First aid kit and warning triangle Figs 193 Placing of the first aid kit B5E 0202 B5E 0203 Fig 194 Placing of the warning triangle Octavia Octavia Estate Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 227 First aid box The first aid kit A is attached by a strap in the right hand storage compartment in the luggage compartment Fig 193 Warning triangle Octavia The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber straps Fig 194 A Warning triangle Octavia Estate The warning triangle can be secured with straps in the right storage compart ment in the luggage compartment
249. ich is connected firmly to the en gine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle gt Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start terminate the attempt to start the engine after 10 seconds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process gt Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the dis charged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and in sulated terminal clamps Observe the manufacturer s instructions Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black Emergency equipment and self help 235 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Fig 202 Engine compartment Earth B5E 0142 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 235 On vehicles with the START STOP system the jump start cable must be connec ted only to the ground point of the engine Fig 202 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye 287 Rear towin
250. icle settings CAR button The main beam can be switched on when the low beam lights are on On vehicles with Headlight assist when the lever is put into position C the As sistant is activated page 55 The headlight flasher system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off FJ WARNING Only use the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled a The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a curve or after making a turn a The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails Automatic driving lamp control Fig 5l Light switch B5E 0102 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 If the light switch is in position AUTO Fig 31 the side lights and low beam and number plate light are switched on off automatically The light is regulated based on data gathered by the light sensor attached be tween the windscreen and the interior mirror The sensitivity of the light sensor can be activated deactivated in the Infotain ment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button If the light switch is in position AUTO the symbol AUTO lights up next to the light switch If the light is switched on automatically the symbol next to the light switch also lights up Automatic headlight control in rain If the light switch i
251. id If you cover the sensor 2 at the same time as the sensor 1 Fig 15 when un locking the vehicle it is not unlocked If the vehicle is locked via the sensor 1 it will not be possible to unlock it again in the following 2 seconds via the sensor 2 prevents accidental unlocking The KESSY system can find the valid key even if it was left in the front of the ve hicle s roof for example D Fig 15 It is therefore not always necessary to know where the key is Always check to see whether the vehicle is locked Further information about the KESSY system page 38 CAUTION Do not use objects which might prevent direct contact between the hand and the grip sensor Some types of gloves can impair the function of the grip sensor a After leaving the vehicle it does not lock automatically the procedure for lock ing the vehicle must therefore be observed a f the battery in the key is weak or discharged the vehicle may not be unlocked or locked via the KESSY system In this case use the emergency unlocking or emergency locking on the driver s door page 240 Safe securing system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside Afterwards it is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside This fact is pointed out by the following
252. igh pressure cleaner First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 193 When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material E WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters l CAUTION a f washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner en sure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door panel joints risk of freezing a To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners or steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed a The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C risk of damaging the vehicle a See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high pressure clean er page 196 194 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork _ S S Plastic parts 195 Rubber seals 195 Chrome parts 986 Decorative films 196 De icing windows and exterior mirrors 196 Headlight lenses _ SSS Door lock cyli
253. ight B5E 0131 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 gt Remove the rubber cover 4 Fig 218 on page 248 gt Turn the bulb holder B Fig 221 anti clockwise up to the stop and remove gt Replace the bulb insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in a clock wise direction to the stop gt Insert the rubber cover Replacing the bulb for the fog lights Fig 222 Front bumper Remove the protective grille fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 Removing the protective grille gt Release the protective grille in the area of the arrow Fig 222 A using the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 228 Vehicle too kit gt Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 222 Changing light bulbs for fog lights gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the fog lamp Fig 222 gt Unlock the fuse in the direction of the arrow 2 with the screwdriver gt Remove the headlight in the direction of the arrow 3 gt Remove the connector gt Turn the bulb holder A Fig 223 anti clockwise to the stop and remove gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn clockwise as far as the stop gt Fit the connector gt Replace the fog lamp by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 3 Fig 222
254. in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside b The automatic activation can be turned off by pressing the symbol button A C The automatic activation can be turned off by pressing the symbol button lt d Warmer air is directed to the footwell than to the upper part of the body We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 107 on page 102 in the open position in all operating modes Recirculated air mode First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing ina traffic jam 106 Using the system Switching on off gt Press the symbol button The warning light below the button lights up gt Press the symbol button lt again The warning light below the button goes out Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 110 on page 105 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the symbol button EJ WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as s
255. in order to ensure the full functionality of the anti theft alarm system E Note The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years Activating deactivating First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 39 Activating The anti theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 45 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally Deactivating The anti theft alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is un locked If the vehicle is not opened within 45 seconds the anti theft alarm sys tem is automatically activated again The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle it Note When the Vehicle is unlocked using the key on the driver s door insert the key into the ignition and switch on the ignition in order to deactivate the alarm sys tem Unlocking and opening 39 Interior monitor and towing protection Fig 19 Button for interior monitor and towing protection B5E 0027 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 39 The interior monitor detects movements inside the car
256. in the memory Briefly press the rocker button B in position RES to resume the stored speed af ter the clutch or brake pedal is released Information on the display Fig 135 Instrument cluster display Examples of status displays the CCS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 Explanation of graphic A The GRA is temporarily switched off System fault Seek help from a specialist garage The speed memory is blank D The GRA is switched on ae Sta a da pa om Cruise CoOnTtTroI CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Instructions and Information 143 Radar sensor 144 Operation 145 Automatic stop start 146 Operation Overview 146 Start control 146 Stop resume control 147 Set change the desired speed gt Set time interval level 148 Special driving conditions 148 Information messages CAS Adaptive cruise control From here on referred to only as ACC can maintain the set speed or the proximity to the vehicle ahead consistently without the need to operate the gas or brake pedals The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described as control from here on FJ wAaRNING The ACC only works as an aid it does not absolve the driver of the respon sibility to maintain full control over the vehicle s steering a Always adapt your speed and safety proximity
257. indicated F WARNING Even at temperatures around 4 C black ice may still be on the road surface Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature dis First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn play that there is no ice on the road ings H on page 25 The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about indi vidual vehicle systems These alerts and messages appear in the display of the in strument cluster 2 Fig 2 on page 9 hereafter only in the display The information system provides the following information gt Outside temperature page 25 gt Recommended gear page 26 gt Door boot lid and bonnet warning page 26 gt Eco tips page 26 gt Service interval display page 12 gt Auto Check Control page 13 gt Warning icons page 20 gt Driving data multifunction display page 28 Information system 25 Recommended gear Fig 7 Recommended gear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into an other gear is indicated in the display Information about the currently selected gear is shown in the upper part of the display Fig 7 A When the system determines that a change in gear is required the arrow symbol gt and the recommended gear appear next to the cur
258. influenced by the selection of driving mode page 156 114 Driving CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic immobiliser TB Ignition lock 115 Starting the engine 115 Stopping the engine gt G Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY system page 116 The engine can only be started with an appropriate original key The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem E WARNING a When leaving the vehicle the ignition must always be removed This is par ticularly important if children are left in the vehicle Otherwise the children could for example start the engine risk of accident or injury Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases of the engine contain besides the odourless and colourless car bon monoxide a poisonous gas risk of life Carbon monoxide can cause un consciousness and death Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes CAUTION a The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehi cle is at a standstill The starter or engi
259. ing when the car accelerates when driving downhill and when cornering EI WARNING If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it have it inspected im mediately by a specialist garage Belt tensioners Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 178 Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three point seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front EI WARNING a Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to replace the entire system Note a Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an indi cation of a
260. ing the button B or the adjustment wheel D activates the setup mode for the speed limit gt Press button A or turn adjustment wheel D to set the desired speed limit e g 50 km h gt Confirm the speed limit by pressing button B or adjustment wheel D or wait around 5 seconds Your settings are saved automatically This allows you to set the speed in 5 km h intervals Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt Press button A Fig 11 or turn adjustment wheel D to select menu item Warning at gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt By pressing the button B or the adjustment wheel D the current speed is ac cepted as the speed limit the value flashes If you wish to change the set speed limit it is changed in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Press again the button B or the adjustment wheel D to confirm the speed lim it or wait approx 5 seconds and the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing Change or delete speed limit gt Press button A Fig 11 or turn adjustment wheel D to select menu item Warning at gt Pressing the button B or the adjustment wheel D deletes the speed limit gt Pressing the button B or the adjustment wheel D again activates change mode for the speed limit If the pre set speed is exceeded an acoustic signal appears as a warning tone and a war
261. ing the driver s door Unlocking the tailgate Emergency equipment Fire extinguisher First aid kit Jack Vehicle tool kit Warning triangle Emissions Engine Running in Engine compartment Brake fluid Coolant Overview Vehicle battery 134 115 132 241 229 240 235 240 T19 119 238 236 232 240 240 228 227 228 228 227 254 125 206 214 213 209 215 Engine oil 210 Capacity 211 Changing 212 Checking 211 Replenishing 212 Specifications 211 Warning icon 21 22 Entry lighting 60 Environment 126 Environmental compatibility 129 Environmentally friendly driving 126 EPC Warning light 18 ESC Function 132 Warning light 17 Exhaust inspection system Warning light 17 F Fans 74 Fastening elements 86 Fatigue detection 162 Function 163 Information messages 163 Films 196 Fire extinguisher 228 First aid kit 227 Floor covering Fixing 88 Floor mats 121 See Floor mats 121 Fog lights 56 Warning light 19 Fog lights with the CORNER function 56 Force limiter electrical power windows 46 electric luggage compartment lid Octavia Estate 41 sliding tilting roof Octavia Estate 49 sliding tilting roof Octavia 47 Foreign countries Unleaded petrol 131 Front airbag 182 Front Assist 149 A
262. ing the remote control key The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal inter ference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same fre quency range Note For vehicles with the anti theft alarm system the acoustic signals can additional ly also be enabled disabled when unlocking locking Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings key CAR Unlocking locking KESSY B5E 0026 Fig 15 KESSY Name of the zones sensors in the front door handle First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 The KESSY system Keyless Entry Start Exit System enables unlocking and lock ing of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key The key must be located at a maximum distance of about 1 5 m from the unlocking or locking area Fig 15 Unlocking gt Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor 2 Fig 15 with the whole palm of your hand Locking gt Touch the sensor 1 Fig 15 with your fingers On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox the selector lever must be moved into the position P before unlocking Unlocking the boot lid gt Press the handle of the boot lid Fig 20 on page 41 Switching off the safelock system gt Use your fingers to touch the sensor 1 twice within 2 seconds Unlocking or locking areas A Front door left Front door right Luggage compartment l
263. ion al faults risk of accident and serious injuries We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations carried out by a specialist garage a Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults This interference can also impair not directly affected sys tems because of the networking of the electronic components The operation al safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to increased wear of parts The KODA Partner accepts no liability for products that have not been ap proved by SKODA AUTO a s even though these may be products with an op erational approval or that have been approved by a government testing insti tute EJ wARNING a We advise you only to use KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle Reliability safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts can be purchased from SKODA Partners who will also perform the professional assembly of the purchased parts SA For the sake of the environment Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers later This ensures that vehicle recycling is in accordance with environmental regulations Note Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the ap
264. ion of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage a Under certain circumstances the system may not function correctly for exam ple if the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or a temporary spare wheel 138 Driving Finding a parking space A YJ f Fig 132 System button displays in the instrument cluster display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 137 The search for a suitable parking space takes place while the display is switched off If the display is not switched on using the symbol button Pe until the driver drives past the parking space the system can assess and display this parking space Finding a parallel parking space gt Drive past the parking space at up to 40 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m gt Press the symbol button Pe Fig 132 once The following is shown in the information display of the information clus ter Fig 132 B Finding a perpendicular parking space gt Drive past the parking space at up to 20 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m gt Press the symbol button twice Pe Fig 132 The following is shown in the information display of the information clus ter Fig 132 c The search area for the parking space on the front passenger s side is automati cally shown in the instrument cluster display Activate the turn si
265. ior to making a long journey We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motor way trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high moun tain pass The warning icon is displayed in the instrument cluster if the oil level is too low page 22 Check the oil level using the dipstick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly CAUTION The oil level must not exceed the range A Fig 183 there is a risk of damaging the exhaust system Replenishing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 gt Check the oil level page 211 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening Fig 181 on page 209 gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct specifi cations page 211 gt Check the oil level page 211 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully 212 General Maintenance Changing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 210 The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator page 12 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Capacity 213 Checking the coolant level 213 Replenishing 214 T
266. ipped with a removable insert Open close gt Pull the handle A Fig 74 on the upper section of the recess and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow Closing takes place in the reverse order EI warnine The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire 230 volt power TOMS Centre console at rear 230 Volt power socket B5E 0088 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Use gt Fold out the lid on the power socket in the direction of the arrow Fig 75 gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket The 230 Volt power socket can only be used when the ignition is switched on H When the plug on the electrical appliance is inserted into the power socket the child safety lock is released and the power socket is activated LED display gt Permanent green light The power socket is activated gt Flashing red light The power socket is temporarily deactivated The power socket is deactivated automatically when the amperage is too high the temperature is too high or the battery charge state is too low When the reasons for the deactivation no longer apply the power socket will be re activated automatically Then re activate connected devices which are switch ed on H FJ warnine a The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical a
267. ire travelling time Otherwise in the event of an accident the child would be thrown through the vehicle and as a result may suffer fatal injuries and also injure other occu pants 188 Safety I WARNING Continued a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehi cle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the air bag system is deployed a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fittings It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat Further information page 189 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat CAUTION When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward adjust the head re Straints so that they are as high as possible a f the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed even in the highest
268. is a fault in the ESC system The following message is shown in the information cluster display 0 Error Electronic Stability Control ESC ESCERROR Seek help from a specialist garage If the warning light 5 comes on after starting the engine the ESC system may be switched off for technical reasons gt Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light 2 does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ESC system is fully functional again Further information page 132 Electronic Stability Control ESC Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light amp comes on after switching on the ignition If the warning light does not go out after moving a short distance this means there is an error in the system Seek help from a specialist garage Antilock brake system ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 14 If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the information cluster display Error ABS ABSERROR The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek help from a specialist garage Further information page 133 Antilock Braking System ABS FJ warninec a If the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light do not continue your journey Seek help from a specialist garage A faul
269. is more than 30 km h the warning light 4 flashes and you will hear an acoustic signal If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next approx 2 seconds the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light 4 lights up permanently Further information page 175 Seat belts Power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up this indicates a partial failure of the power steer ing and the steering forces can be greater Seek help from a specialist garage If the warning light lights up this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the steering assist has failed significantly higher steering forces Seek help from a specialist garage Further information page 114 16 Using the system Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light should go out after driving a short distance If after a new engine start and a short ride the yellow warning light does not go out seek help from a specialist garage Traction Control System ASR First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If your vehicle is equipped with the ESC system the TCS is part of the ESC page 132 The warning light flashes to show that the ASR is currently opera
270. is the case have the sensor checked by a specialist garage a Any improperly carried out work to the front of the vehicle may cause the sensor to become misaligned We therefore recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations carried out by a specialist garage Please also observed the instructions in page 200 Modifications repairs and technical alterations a The area in front of and around the sensor must not be covered with stick ers additional lights or similar items This can lead to impaired function of the sensor risk of accidents EJ warninec The sensor may not be able to distinguish all objects correctly under certain circumstances You should therefore not use Front Assist in the following ca ses risk of accidents a When driving through places where metal objects such as metal buildings railroad tracks etc can be found a When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces such as large ca pacity garages car ferries and the like CAUTION a Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent free de icer Operation Fig 143 Instrument cluster display Note dangerous proximity advance warning or intervention of the city emergency braking function First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 149 Front Assist assists the driver while driving in the following ways gt Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehic
271. isibility weather road and traffic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and gross permissible weight of the vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of accident CAUTION Only use roof rack systems approved by KODA AUTO a s a f other roof rack systems are used or if the roof bars are not fitted correctly any resulting damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty Therefore ob serve the supplied fitting instructions for the roof rack system are observed a On models fitted with a sliding tilting roof ensure that the sliding tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the luggage compartment lid does not hit the roof load when opened a The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clear ances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load SA For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption Note The removed roof rack for the Octavia Estate can be stowed in the stowage com partment under the variable loading floor page 91 Stowing roll up luggage compartment cover and roof racks Attachment points Does not apply to the Octa
272. isplay gt Speed limit gt Overtaking prohibited Additional signs such as when wet or signs which only apply for a limited time can also be displayed The system works on the basis of the data captured by the camera and is only I m able to show traffic signs which are in the camera s viewing range Fig 151 Data from the camera can be supplemented by information from the Infotainment Navigation This is the reason why traffic signs with maximum speeds can also be shown on sections of roads which do not have any traffic signs The system may not be available or may only be available to a limited extent in the following situations gt Poor visibility conditions e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall gt The camera is blinded by the sun gt The camera is blinded by the oncoming traffic gt The camera viewing range is obstructed by an obstacle gt Travelling at high speed gt The traffic signs are fully or partially obscured e g by trees snow dirt or other vehicles gt The traffic signs are not standard round with a red border gt The traffic signs are damaged or bent Assist systems 161 gt The traffic signs are attached to flashing neon signs gt The traffic signs were changed the navigation data are out of date Notifications and settings Traffic sign 16 5 c Fig 152 Instrument cluster display Example of the traffic sign recognition notifications additional no
273. ite the direction of travel gt Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 230 252 Do it yourself Ci gt Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction of the arrow 2 Install gt Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely gt Insert the light into the brackets in the body Fig 230 D gt Carefully press the tail lamp assembly into the bodywork so that the bolts 1 Fig 231 on page 252 on the light latch with the mounts in the body M Be careful not to pinch the cable bundle between the bodywork and light gt Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover gt Ensure that the cover engages firmly CAUTION a Ensure that the cable bundle is not pinched between the bodywork and the light as it is refitted there is a risk of damage to the electric installation and wa ter ingress a If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has been pinched we recommend that you have the connection of the light checked by a specialist garage Replacing bulbs in rear light Octavia Estate Fig 231 Outer part of the light Basic light light with LED diodes First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 Outer part of the light gt Turn the bulb holder 2 Fig 231 anti clockwise remove it from the lamp hous ing gt Turn the faulty
274. ith a maximum size of 98 mm x 104 mm x 142 mm The area C of the stowage compartment is designed for the storage of smaller objects EI warnine For safety reasons the storage compartment should not be opened to an end stop while driving 80 Using the system Glasses storage box Fig 70 Opening the glasses storage box B5E 0098 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Opening gt Press on the lid of the glasses storage box in the area A Fig 70 The box folds in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid on the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar row Fig 70 until it audibly locks into place EI WARNING The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed a The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle risk of im pairment to the functions of the anti theft alarm system CAUTION Do not put any heat sensitive objects in the glasses storage box they may be damaged Storage compartment on the passenger side ES TEO Fig 71 Open storage compartment control cooling of storage compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 A pen and credit card holder is provided in the stowage compartment Opening gt Pull the handle of the flap in the direction of the arrow Fig 71 A and f
275. ition is switched on Folding in of both mirrors can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment op erating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Automatic dimming mirror The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the automatic dimming interior mirror page 65 Tilting surface of front passenger mirror On vehicles fitted with the memory function for the driver seat page 70 the surface of the mirror tilts down slightly when the reverse gear is engaged and the rotary knob is in the position R or in position L on vehicles with right hand drive Fig 47 This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the pavement when parking the car The mirror returns into its initial position after the rotary knob is moved out of the position R or position L on vehicles with right hand drive and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km h Tilting the surface of the front passenger mirror can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle set tings CAR button Memory function for mirrors On vehicles fitted with the memory function for the driver seat page 70 or the memory function for the remote control key page 70 it is possible to save the position of the exterior mirror when saving the driver seat position HE WARNING Continued a Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Childr
276. k the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold any memory button B Fig 52 on page 70 After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button at the same time press the but ton 8 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful activation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal The seat and exterior mirror settings are not saved in the memory of the key which is already saved in the memory button The seat can be adjusted to the required position if necessary page 68 After locking the vehicle the current positions of the driver s seat and the exter nal mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key Deactivating the function gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold the button A Fig 52 on page 70 At the same time press the button 8 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful deactivation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat or the button 8 on the remote control key i Note Once the function has been activated it remains active until deactivation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Seat heaters 71 Armrest front 72 Rear armrest 72 Folding front passenger seat 72 Seat backrests 73 Seat heaters B5E 0011 Fig 53 Heating Front seats rear se
277. ke system however if the fluid lev el drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the MIN marking If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the warning light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 15 Braking system Changing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake sys tem The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50714 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Battery cover _ RT Checking the battery electrolyte level RT Charging a vehicle battery 28 Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery 2188 Automatic load deactivation 29 Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Symbol Description Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye protec tion Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the ve hicle battery When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas mixture is produced Keep children away from the vehicle battery 8 eO Improper han
278. km h 229 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 7 4 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 660 a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 258 Technical data 2 0 Itr 162 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 162 4500 6200 350 1500 4400 4 1984 OCTAVIA RS MG6 OCTAVIA RS DSG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE DSG6 Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 1 6 Itr 66 kW TDI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 66 2750 4800 230 1400 2700 4 1598 OCTAVIA MG5 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG5 Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 14002 1700 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Technical data 259 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI engine 77 3000 4000 250 1500 2750 4 1598 OCTAVIA MGS OCTAVIA DSG7 OCTAVIAESTATE MG5 OCTAVA ESTATE OCTAVIA ESTATE MGS Top speed km h 194 194 191 191 188 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 8 10 9 11 0 11 1 11 7 Permissible t
279. knee airbag when it is deployed and can cause injuries The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats Fig 168 A When the side airbags Fig 169 are deployed the head airbag and belt tensioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side Airbagsystem 183 The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated air bag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pelvis is E WARNING reduced on the side facing the door a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth E WARNING ing a Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case a Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by KODA In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non ap proved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag a Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage a The airbag modules in the front seats must not displa
280. l equipment 77 Cigarette lighter Fig 65 Cigarette lighter B5E 0114 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Using the system gt Press in the button of the cigarette lighter Fig 65 gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket FI warnine a Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper usage can case burns The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn Therefore never leave children unattended in the ve hicle ia Note The cigarette lighter socket cannot be used as a 12Volt socket Further information page 200 Modifications repairs and technical altera tions 78 Using the system Ashtray Fig 66 Ashtrays front rear Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Removing inserting the front ash tray gt Pull out the ashtray Fig 66 A in the direction of the arrow Insertion takes place in the reverse order Removing inserting the rear ashtray insert gt Open the storage compartment page 82 gt Grasp the insert in the area marked with the arrows and remove it in the direc tion of the arrow 1 Fig 66 B Insertion takes place in the reverse order EI WARNING Never place flammable
281. l locking front door right power windows left 26 Heated front seats 27 Music amplifier 28 Tow hitch 29 Not assigned 30 Not assigned 31 Headlight left 32 Parking aid Park Assist 33 Airbag TCS button ESC tyre control display pressure sensor for air condi 34 tioning reverse light switch dimming rear view mirror START STOP button telephone preinstallation control for heating of rear seats sensor for air conditioning 230 V power socket sound actuator 35 Headlight headlamp beam adjustment diagnostic connector camera radar 36 Headlight right 37 Headlight left 38 Tow hitch 39 Control unit for central locking front door right power windows front and rear right 40 12 Volt power socket 41 CNG relay 42 Control unit for central locking rear door left right headlight clean ing system windscreen wipers 43 Visor for gas discharge bulbs interior lighting 44 Tow hitch Fuses and light bulbs 245 Power consumer Control unit for control of seat adjustment 230 Volt power socket Rear window wiper Not assigned Coil on starter relay clutch pedal switch Not assigned Belt tensioner front passenger side Not assigned Relay for rear window heater Fuses in the engine compartment Fig 216 Fuse box cover in engine compartment Schematic diagram of the fuse box Fig 217 Cover for the fuse box in the en gine compartment Plastic clip for fuses
282. latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached Very high engine speeds when accelerating accelerator are automatically restricted J With vehicles with a manual gearbox do not drive at unnecessarily low engine speeds Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Ob serve the recommended gear page 26 CAUTION a The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting down at the wrong time This can result in the sudden increase in revs beyond the permissible maximum rpm and thus cause engine damage a Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in in dividual gears Starting off and Driving 125 SA For the sake of the environment Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds Shifting up sooner helps save on fuel reduces engine noises and protects the environment New tyres Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 125 New tyres have to be run in since they do not offer optimal grip at first Drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so New brake pads AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 125 New brake pads initially do not provide optimal braking performance They first need to be run in Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or so CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects
283. le ahead gt Warns you of an impending collision gt Prepares the brakes for emergency braking prior to a detected danger gt Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver gt If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger an automatic brake action is performed Front Assist can work only if the following basic conditions are met J Front Assist is enabled V TCSis enabled page 132 Brake assist systems v The vehicle is traveling forwards at a speed of more than approx 5 km h proximity warning dangerous proximity If a safe time interval to the vehicle ahead is exceeded the display of the instru ment cluster shows the symbol Fig 143 A Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows you to do so The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km h and 210 km h Assist systems 151 Advance warning If Front Assist detects a risk of collision with a vehicle ahead a symbol appears in the display of the instrument cluster and an acoustic signal is heard Fig 143 B At the same time the braking system is prepared for possible emergency braking The advance warning may occur when driving between 30 km h and 210 km h Apply the brakes or avoid the obstacle Acute alert If the driver does not react to the advance warning Front Assist briefly applies th
284. le click the variable loading floor can be stowed in the upper posi tion by pushing it forward The room under the variable loading floor can be used to store away objects Set into the lower position gt Check that there are no objects in the space under the variable loading floor gt Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A Fig 98 gt Lift the variable loading floor about 10 cm in the direction of the arrow 2 and pull it back in the direction of the arrow 3 The variable loading floor moves automatically to the lower position where it can be stored by pressing it forward The variable loading floor can be folded up in both positions page 96 or used for dividing the luggage compartment page 96 Seats and useful equipment 95 Fold up variable loading floor Fig 99 fold up variable loading floor Fig 100 Variable loading floor folded up in the lower position in the upper position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 94 The variable loading floor can be folded up in the lower and the upper posi tion Fig 100 gt Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A Fig 99 and lift in the direction of the arrow 1 gt Fold up the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow 2 96 Using the system Dividing the luggage compartment Fig 101 Dividing the boot with variable loading fl
285. leather 199 Plastic parts 195 Wheels 197 Climatronic 107 automatic mode 108 Control elements 107 Controlling blower 109 Cooling system 108 Defrosting windscreen T10 Recirculated air mode 109 Setting temperature 108 Clock 12 Clothes hook 82 Cockpit 12 volt power outlet 79 Ashtray 78 Cigarette lighter 78 General view 7 Lighting 58 Storage compartments 74 Useful equipment 74 COMING HOME 57 Component protection 202 Computer see multifunction display 28 Convenience consumers 128 Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof Oc tavia Estate 50 Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof Oc tavia 48 Index 263 Coolant 212 Checking 213 Replenishing 214 Temperature gauge T Warning icon 21 Correct seated position 172 Driver 173 Front passenger 173 Instructions 174 Rear seats 174 Counter for distance driven 12 Cruise control system Activating deactivating 142 Changing the stored speed 142 Storing and maintaining speed 142 Switching off temporarily 142 Warning light 19 Cruise Control System 141 Cup holders 77 D Daytime running lights 52 De icing the windscreen and rear window _ _ 60 Deactivating an airbag 185 Decorative films 196 Delayed locking of the boot lid see Boot lid 41 Diesel refer to Fuel 206 Diesel fuel Operation in winter 206 Diesel particle filter 22 Digital clock 12 Dipstick 211 Display 10 Coolant temperature
286. level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle Fig 184 Coolant level within range A No coolant must be refilled The level may also rise slightly above the A marking when the engine is warm Coolant level within range A and Coolant can be refilled When the engine is cold the coolant level must lie between the A and B mark ings Coolant level within range under Coolant must be refilled Inspecting and replenishing 213 When the engine is cold refill the coolant between the markings A and B If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the warning icon lighting up in the instrument cluster page 21 Coolant We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a specialist garage Replenishing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 212 Only refill with new coolant gt Switch off the engine gt Allow the engine to cool gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir and unscrew the cap carefully gt Replenish the coolant gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency In this case use
287. lid Electric luggage compartment lid Octavia Estate Electrical power windows Panoramic sliding tilting roof Octavia Panoramic sliding tilting roof Octavia Estate _ Lights and visibility Lights Interior lights Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear mirror Seats and useful equipment Adjusting the seats Seat features 32 Useful equipment Luggage compartment Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Estate Net partition Octavia Estate Roof rack system Heating and air conditioning system Heating ventilation cooling Heating Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system Climatronic automatic air conditioning system Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation Driving Starting off and Driving Steering Start and stop the engine with the key Start and stop the engine KESSY Braking Manual shifting of gears and pedals Automatic transmission Running in Economical driving and environmental sustainability Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving abroad Assist systems Brake assist systems Parking aid Park assist Cruise Control System Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Area monitoring system Front Assist START STOP 74 85 94 96 98 101 101 103 105 107 T10 113 113 114 T16 T19 121 121 125
288. lid and the fuel filler flap are locked gt The interior light operated via the door contact goes out gt The safe securing system is switched on 0 Depending on the individual setting page 36 32 Using the system gt The warning light in the driver door begins flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is activated Displaying an error If the warning light in the driver s door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec onds and then lights up for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing again slowly you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage F WARNING a f the car is locked and the safe securing system is activated there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk of death a Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for ex ample at road crossings i Note a In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehi cle a Only the driver s door can be unlocked or locked using the key if the central locking system fails page 33 The other doors and the boot lid can be emer gency locked or unlocked a Emergency locking of the door page 240 a Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment lid
289. ligned to the chest a When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed CQ Introduction FJ WARNING Fig 114 SN one aP Correct seated position for the When driving the ignition key must always be in the position 2 Fig 116 on driver page 115 ignition switched on without the engine running This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on If this is not the case it could result in unexpected locking of the steering wheel risk of accident Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steering wheel could block risk of accident i Note We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the steering wheel position Hsi acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car Power steering 114 E wARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary a Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A Fig 114 between the steering wheel and your chest i
290. loor covering 92 Multifunction box 93 Multifunction box Octavia Estate 94 Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling char acteristics of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the nets page 86 In the event of an accident there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the ve hicle is travelling and the weight of the object Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an unsecured object with a weight of 4 5 kg produces an energy which corresponds to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg You can imagine the injuries that can occur if this object flies through the interior com partment and hits an occupant Luggage compartment light The light switches on off when the boot lid is opened or closed If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 10 minutes FJ warninec a Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the lash ing eyes Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road
291. lso offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar FJ warnine General There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing Additionally clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of cloth ing a The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head air bags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the accessories fitted could conditions permitting be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants page 200 a The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed a There must no other persons e g children or animals between the passen ger and the deployment area of the head airbag In addition none of the occu pants should lean their head out of the window when driving or extend their arms and hands out of the window EJ warninec The airbag control unit operates with pressure sensors located in the
292. luggage compartment empty 2 All seats occupied luggage compartment loaded 3 Driver seat occupied luggage compartment loaded EI WARNING Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions a The vehicle does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming vehicles The beam range is sufficient for safe driving 52 Using the system f E i Note I a We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on a The Bi Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the ve hicle when the ignition is switched on and when driving Vehicles that are equip ped with Bi Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range adjustment control Daytime running lights DAY LIGHT First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 The daytime running lights function provides the lighting of the front of the vehi cle Activating deactivating daytime running lights on vehicles with Infotainment The daytime running light can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment op erating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Deactivating daytime running lights on vehicles without Infotainment gt Pull the turn signal and main beam lever to the steering wheel and push down wards Fig 30 on page 53 gt At the same time switch on the ignition and hold the lever down in this position for at least 3 seco
293. ly This applies particularly to light coloured seat covers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Seat covers First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 198 Electrically heated seats Do not clean the covers by moistening as this can damage the seat heating sys tem Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers Seats without seat heating Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use can be removed by brush ing against the direction of hair with a damp brush Always clean all parts of the covers so that there are no visible edges Then allow the seat to dry completely CAUTION a Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner a Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the heater 200 General Maintenance a Do not sit on wet seats risk of seat deformation a Always clean the seats from seam to seam Seat belts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 198 The belt webbing must always be kept clean Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush Dirty b
294. ly if the rocker button is pressed and held in the RES position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed with the rocker button The stored speed can be reduced by pressing the rocker button B Fig 134 on page 142 into the position SET The speed will decrease continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than 25 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased The speed must then be stored again by press ing the rocker button B in the position SET after increasing the speed of the ve hicle to more than 25 km h Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator pedal Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed Decreasing the speed with the brake pedal The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which temporarily deactivates the system page 142 Switching off temporarily First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 141 The cruise control system is temporarily switched off by pressing the switch A Fig 134 on page 142 into the spring tensioned position CANCEL or by de pressing the brake pedal The set speed remains stored
295. m for deactivating the airbag a f the ON OFF warning light is flashing the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in an accident Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga rage immediately Airbag system 187 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 189 Child safety and side airbag 190 Classification of child seats 190 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 190 Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory provi sions Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard must be used The ECE R standard stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard have a test seal that cannot be removed a large E within a circle with the test number below E WARNING a The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats a One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Certain outside climatic con ditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a The child must be secured in the vehicle during the ent
296. m h The head light switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km h When the assistant automatically switches on the main beam warning light 20 is lit in the instrument cluster Activating gt Turn the light switch into position AUTO Fig 31 on page 53 gt Place the lever in position A spring tensioned position Fig 32 The warning icon for the activated headlight assist appears in the display of the instrument cluster Deactivating gt If the headlight is currently switched on automatically move the lever into posi tion B spring tensioned position Fig 32 gt If the headlight is not currently switched on automatically move the lever into position A the headlight switches on followed by position B If you want to reactivate the Assist put the lever back into position A The Assist can also be deactivated when the light switch is turned from position AUTO to another position Manually switching on the headlights If the headlight is not switched on automatically it can be switched on manually put the lever into position A The assistant is deactivated the warning icon z goes out Manually switching off the headlights If the headlight is switched on automatically it can be switched off manually put the lever into position B The assistant is deactivated the warning icon goes out Information message The messages and information are indicated in the instrument
297. m regards the situation as an intended lane change The system can intervene when the following basic conditions are present The system is activated The vehicle is travelling at more than 65 km h The boundary lines are clearly visible appropriate longitudinal markings The boundary line of at least one side of the lane is detected The driver s hands are on the steering wheel The lane is more than 2 5 m in width 5585 Assist systems 159 Adaptive lane assist Adaptive lane assist helps to keep the vehicle in the position between the boun dary lines selected by the driver by means of steering intervention If the system detects only one boundary line it will help to maintain the selected proximity from said boundary line If the proximity to the detected boundary line is changed the system quickly adapts and maintains the newly selected position Adaptive lane assist can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Activating deactivating First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The system can be activated or deactivated in the Infotainment Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings CAR button or in the information dis play page 28 Menu item wizard Explanation of situations fs fs trip km trip km trip km mel V A 758729 Ve Fig 149 Monochromatic display
298. matic dimming is activated the mirror dims automatically depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged the mir ror always moves back into the basic position not dimmed Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicinity of the automatic dimming interior mirror page 64 H in section Introduction Additional interior mirror Fig 46 Additional interior mirror First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 The additional interior mirror allows the driver a wider field of view of the rear seats Adjusting the angle gt Take hold of both the upper and lower edge of the mirror such that you are not touching the surface of the mirror gt Adjust the mirror in direction of arrow to the desired position EJ warnine Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Use the additional interior mirror only to such an extent that you are in full control of your vehicle in all traffic situations Lights and visibility 65 Exterior mirrors Fig 47 Rotary knob BSE 0056 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 Mirror heater gt Set the rotary knob into the position GA Fig 47 The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and
299. mation cluster display Key in vehicle KEY IN VEHICLE Additionally on vehicles which are fitted with the anti theft alarm system an au dible signal sounds The system has not found a key If the system has not found a key in the vehicle the following message appears in the display of the instrument cluster Key not found Key not detected Log book NOKEY This can occur if the key is outside the vehicle the battery in the key is dis charged the key is defective or the electromagnetic field is strongly disturbed 38 Using the system Fault in KESSY system If there is a fault in the KESSY system the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster Keyless access system faulty KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM FAULTY Seek help from a specialist garage Low voltage of the key battery If the voltage of the battery in the remote control key is too low the following message appears in the display of the instrument cluster Change the key battery KEY BATTERY PLEASE CHANGE Change the key battery page 238 Parking vehicle AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 38 If the vehicle is not unlocked within 60 or 90 hours the sensors in the handle of the driver front passenger s door are deactivated automatically Fig 15 on page 35 Activation after 60 hours gt Unlock the driver s door using the sensor 2 Fig 15 on page 35 gt Press t
300. meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to pro tecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODA vehicles can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a lot of countries sufficient trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confir mation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations Starting off and Driving 129 i Note You can find more detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects General information 130 Driving through water on streets 130 General information Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 130 Pay attention to low slung parts of the vehicle such as the spoiler and exhaust particularly in the following situations gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and lanes gt When driving over kerb stones gt When driving on steep ramps etc Particular attention is necessary for vehicle with a sport suspension and when then vehicle is fully laden Driving through water on streets Fig 127 Driving through water B5E 0033 130 Driving Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 130 The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving
301. message on the display of the instrument cluster after switching out the ignition Check SAFELOCK Log book CHECK SAFELOCK If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off the door can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever Switching off The safelock can be switched off by locking twice within 2 seconds Unlocking and opening 35 Switching on The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and unlocked Switch on display The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals Switch off display The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds Individual settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 The following functions of the central locking system can be set individual ly owner s manual of Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings button CAR Opening a single door This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The other doors the fuel filler flap and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after be ing opened again Unlocking a vehicle side door This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver s side The other doors the fuel filler flap and the boot lid remain locked and a
302. more than approx 30 seconds or the driv er s door is opened during stop mode on vehicles with manual transmission or on vehicles with automatic transmission when the selector lever in position P the engine must be started manually page 116 After manually starting the engine on vehicles with manual transmission auto matic engine shut down is not possible until the vehicle has travelled the re quired minimum distance for START STOPP mode a If on vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever D S or N is selec ted after moving in reverse the vehicle will first need to achieve a speed greater than 10 km h before automatic engine shut down takes place again a Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temper ature of the vehicle battery even after several hours If the vehicle remains out doors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take sev eral hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system a If the Climatronic is running in automatic mode it is possible that under certain conditions the engine may not switch off automatically Starting shutting down the engine Fig 144 Instrument cluster display En gine shut down STOP phase 24 0 c trip First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Vehicles with manual transmissio
303. n gt Stop the vehicle where necessary apply the handbrake gt Put the gear stick into Neutral gt Release the clutch pedal 154 Driving Automatic engine shut down STOP phase takes place The warning icon Fig 144 appears in the display of the instrument cluster gt Depress the clutch pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again START phase The warning icon goes out Vehicles with automatic transmission gt Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal Automatic engine shut down takes place The warning icon Fig 144 appears in the display of the instrument cluster gt Release the brake pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again The warning icon goes out Further information on automatic transmission Engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in positions P D S N and in Tiptronic mode When the selector lever is in position P the engine remains shut down after you release the brake pedal Start the engine by pressing the gas pedal or by choosing a different gear and releasing the brake pedal If the selector lever is moved into position R during the STOP phase the engine will re start There is no automatic engine shutdown if the system detects a vehicle move ment due to a large steering angle or when the selector lever is moved to posi tion R e g when parking No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low s
304. n be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important gt for safely and quickly reaching the controls gt for a relaxed fatigue free body position gt for achieving maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag a WARNING ee As the front passenger observe the following instructions ne WARNING a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper ly protect you hazard Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injuries or bruises as a re ee Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention The electric front seat adjustment is also functional when the ignition is turned off even with the ignition key removed Therefore children should never be left unattended in the vehicle The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury a Never carry more people than there are number of seats in the vehicle place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of
305. n of graphic Fig 138 A Control deactivated vehicle detected Control activated no vehicle detected Control deactivated no speed stored D Control activated vehicle detected The ACC can consistently maintain the set speed of 30 160 km h as well as the proximity to the vehicle ahead ranging from a very small to a very large time inter val The ACC adjusts the set speed with respect to the detected vehicle ahead thus maintaining the selected proximity If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough with respect to the vehicle ahead the symbol and the following message both appear in the instrument cluster dis play Apply the brake Take over the steering and apply the brake The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx 120m ahead using the radar sensor Automatic stop start First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and start moving again using the ACC Decelerate to a standstill If a vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill the ACC will also decelerate your ve hicle to a standstill Starting to drive again after a holding period As soon as the vehicle ahead starts moving again after a holding period your ve hicle will also move and the speed will continue to be regulated Control is auto matically disconnected in case of longer holding periods Take over the steering and
306. n of the exterior mirror is stored Retrieving the saved setting gt Tap the desired memory button B Fig 52 when the ignition is switched off and the driver s door is opened gt Press down on the desired memory button B when the ignition is switched on and the driver s door is closed 70 Using the system Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat or the button 8 on the remote control key ra Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward you also have to re store the setting of the exterior mirror on the passenger side for reversing Note Memory function of the remote control key First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 67 The automatic storage function of the driver s seat and exterior mirrors position when locking the vehicle can be activated in the memory of the remote control key When this function is activated each time the vehicle is locked the current posi tions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key After subsequently unlocking the vehicle with the same key the driver s seat and the exterior mirrors assume the positions stored in the memory of this key This function can also be activated deactivated in the Infotainment Bedienung sanleitung Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Activating the function gt Unloc
307. n reservoir cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot cool ant a If any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible BE WARNING Continued a Always safely store the coolant additive in its original container out of the reach of children risk of poisoning a If coolant is swallowed consult a doctor immediately Do not leave any items such as cloths or tools in the engine compartment a Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such fluids e g the antifreeze con tained in the coolant may ignite FJ warninc The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when work ing in the engine compartment while the engine is running a Pay particular attention to moving engine parts e g V ribbed belt alterna tor radiator fan and the high voltage ignition unit risk of death m Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts risk of death Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any work EI warninec The following warning instructions must be observed if work has to be carried out on the fuel or electrical systems a Always disconnect the
308. nd colourless car bon monoxide a poisonous gas risk of life Carbon monoxide can cause un consciousness and death a Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes CAUTION a The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehi cle is at a standstill The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activa ted when the engine is running a If the engine does not start after the second attempt the fuse for the electric fuel pump in petrol engines or for the control unit for the glow plug system or the relay for the glow plug system and fuel pump in diesel engines could be faul ty Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 243 or seek assistance from a specialist garage a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the en gine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine a Do not tow start the engine risk of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 235 Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your jour
309. nders 197 Cavity protection 197 Wheels S g Underbody protection 198 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relat ing to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork We recommend using care products from KODA Original Accessories that are available from SKODA Partners The instructions for use on the package must be observed F WARNING Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the in structions a Always store vehicle care products safely in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts l CAUTION a Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts risk of damaging the paintwork surface a Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned SA For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regula tions Note Due to the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any potential prob lems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle we recommend that cleaning and care of the interior of
310. nds Activating daytime running lights on vehicles without Infotainment gt Pull the turn signal and main beam lever to the steering wheel and push up wards Fig 30 on page 53 gt At the same time switch on the ignition and hold the lever down in this position for at least 3 seconds The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following condi tions are met v The ignition is switched on v The light switch is in the position O or AUTO Fig 31 on page 53 Note When the daytime running light is switched on the side lights neither at the front or rear and the number plate lights are not lit Turn signal and main beam Fig 30 Operating lever Turn signal and main beam operation oY First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 The parking light page 58 and headlight flasher are also operated with the op erating lever The following functions can be operated with the operating lever Fig 30 A Right turn signal on Left turn signal on High beam on spring tensioned position D Main beam off or headlight flasher ON spring tensioned position If you only wish to flash three times convenience turn signal briefly push the lever to the pressure point A or where applicable B and release again The convenience turn signal can be activated deactivated in the Infotain ment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Veh
311. ne can be damaged if the starter is activa ted when the engine is running a If the engine does not start after the second attempt the fuse for the electric fuel pump in petrol engines or for the control unit for the glow plug system or the relay for the glow plug system and fuel pump in diesel engines could be faul ty Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 243 or seek assistance from a specialist garage a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the en gine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine Do not tow start the engine risk of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 235 Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower Electronic immobiliser Firs
312. nect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery first of all positive then negative It is not necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the ve hicle battery using low amperages for example from a mini charger Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or lower must be used until full charging is achieved It is necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages so called quick charging The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging Replacing the vehicle battery When replacing a battery the new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage amperage and be the same size Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased from a specialist garage We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be dis posed of in accordance with national regulations EE WARNING Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge 218 General Maintenance CAUTION On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth page 236 Jum
313. ney after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower i Note a After pressing the starter button while the steering is locked the steering is un locked the electrical components are activated e g Infotainment etc and the ignition is switched on a f you do not leave the vehicle after locking the steering and wish to unlock the steering again press the starter button At the same time electrical components are activated e g Infotainment etc and the ignition is switched on a The KESSY system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while driving this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen cy page 119 a The steering is not unlocked or locked if the starter button is repeatedly press ed at short intervals Unlocking and locking the steering KESSY Fig 117 Starter button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 Unlocking gt Open the driver s door and get into the vehicle gt Close the driv
314. ng for safety rea ings H on page 74 sons The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets EJ WARNING The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision Seats and useful equipment 75 Storage compartments in the doors Fig 61 Storage compartment in the front door in the rear door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The area B Fig 61 and D has a bottle holder EI warnine Use the area A Fig 61 of the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not im paired i Note In area D of the stowage compartment of the rear doors a bottle can be housed with a max content of 0 5 I 76 Using the system Holder for reflective vest Fig 62 Driver seat Holder for reflex vest First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The holder for the reflex vest is located under the driver s seat Fig 62 EI WARNING Do not put anything else except the reflective vest into the holder other wise it may fall out of the holder risk of obstruction or limitation in operating the pedal l CAUTION Do not put anything else except the reflective vest into the holder risk of dam age to the holder Storage compartment in the front centre console Fig 63 Opening the
315. ng resistance Additional aerodynamic spoilers Additional covers at rack CD covers Optimised cooling input grid additional seal Reduction by 15 mm with frame Ro Wi tyres wheels with low rolling resistance The green seal represents KODA AUTO commitment to environmentally responsible behaviour SS realised in the GreenLine series It expresses responsible engagement towards the environment and sustainable development fl www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Octavia anglicky 05 2013 965 5610 07 20 5E0 012 003 CR
316. ngthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it a Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as a justified complaint a The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel a Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection a Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat covers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Note During the use of the vehicle minor visible changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the cov ers Artificial leather cloths and Alcantara First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 198 Artificial leather Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the artificial leath
317. ning message appears in the display e g Speed 50 exceeded SPEED TOO HIGH The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition Af ter a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours the pre set speed limit is deleted Information system 31 Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Car key 33 Unlocking locking with the key 33 Lock unlock with the remote control 34 Unlocking locking KESSY 35 Safe securing system 35 Individual settings 36 Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside 36 Child safety lock 37 Opening closing a door z7 Your car is equipped with a central locking system The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors the fuel filler flap and luggage compartment lid at the same time based on the current setting The safe securing system page 35 is integrated in the central locking system Once the car is locked from the outside the door locks are automatically blocked by the safe securing system H The following is true after unlocking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked gt The interior light operated via the door contact illuminates gt The safe securing system is switched off gt The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is deactivated The following is true after locking gt The doors the boot
318. njury a Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork EI warnine The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels e g installation of additional loudspeakers Resulting damage can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage The following instructions must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed BE WARNING Continued a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the re sulting openings have not been properly sealed a Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loud speakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door pan els Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 203 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 204 Unleaded petrol 205 Diesel fuel 206 The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 177 on page 204 B E WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canister
319. ns 62 Using the system CAUTION a In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor a If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures be tween the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again a Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window a Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen a The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms are fol ded out The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while do ing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet a f there is an obstacle on the windscreen the wiper will try to push away the obstacle The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the obsta cle in order to avoid a damage to the wiper Remove the the obstacle and switch the wiper on again a Each time the ignition switches off for the third time the position of the wind screen wip
320. nts risk of serious damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system a The use of unsuitable fuel additives can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system Diesel fuel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 204 Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the Standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia All diesel engines can be operated with diesel fuel with a maximum content of 7 bio fuel B7 which complies with the standard DIN 52638 in Germany in Austria C 1590 in France EN 590 On the Indian market your vehicle will only be able to run on diesel fuel compli ant with standard IS 1460 Bharat IV If diesel fuel which complies with this stand ard is not available you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard IS 1460 Bharat III in case of emergency Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the cold season only use winter grade diesel fuel which will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C 206 General Maintenance It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic The SKODA Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with information regarding the diesel fuels available Pr
321. o driving mode the Normal driv ing mode is configured automatically The maximum vehicle acceleration kickdown function is possible also in driving mode Eco Mode Individual First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 156 In mode Individual you can select between Normal Sport and Eco for each system separately Operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings Assist systems 157 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 158 EI WARNING Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety by ProActive passenger protection must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of accident i Note a f the front passenger front airbag is deactivated page 185 the belt tension ing function for the front passenger seat is switched off The system component service life is monitored electronically Further informa tion page 18 amp Safety Systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 ProActive passenger protection From here on referred to only as system increa ses passenger protection in the front seats in situations that could lead to vehicle impact or overturning The system is ready to intervene automatically in the following conditions v The ignition is switched on J The vehicle moves a
322. o the hand use your other hand to push it upwards At the same time the ball rod latches into the ready position and is thus ready to be re inserted into the mounting recess M gt Place the cap 4 Fig 153 on page 164 on the mounting recess E WARNING Never allow the ball rod to remain unsecured in the boot This could cause damage to the boot upon sudden braking and could put the safety of the oc cupants at risk CAUTION a If the lever is held firm and not pushed downwards as far as it can go it will go back up after the ball rod is removed and will not latch into the ready position The ball rod then needs to be brought into this position before the next time it is installed a Stow the ball head in the ready position with the key inserted in the box When doing so make the side opposite to the inserted key face downwards there is a risk of damaging the key a Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever e g do not climb on it i Note a We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar a Remove any dirt from the ball rod before stowing it away in the box with the vehicle tool kit Use and care First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 164 Seal the mounting recess with the cap to prevent any ingress of dirt Always check the ball head before hitching a trailer Use a suitable lubricating grease where nec
323. oad surface E WARNING Observe the following information regarding the tyre inflation pressure The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure Check the tyre inflation pressure at regular intervals Too low or too high inflation pressure impairs handling risk of an accident a If the inflation pressure is too low the tyre must perform a greater rolling resistance At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout E WARNING Observe the following information regarding the wheel bolts a The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily Never treat them with grease or oil I WARNING Continued a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm f the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can come loose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in per manent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving risk of accident FJ WARNING Observe the following information regarding the spare wheel Only use the spare wheel while absolutely necessary Never drive with more than one spare wheel mounted The snow chain
324. objects in the ashtray risk of fire CAUTION When removing do not hold the ashtray at the cover on the front risk of break age 12 volt power outlet Fig 67 12 Volt power socket in the front centre console in the boot First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Overview of the 12 volt power socket In the front centre console Fig 67 gt In the boot Fig 67 B Use of the 12 volt power socket gt Remove the cover on the power socket Fig 67 A or open the cover on the power socket as appropriate Fig 67 B gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket The 12 volt power sockets and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn H F WARNING Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle a If the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately CAUTION The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical accesso ries with a total power uptake of up to 120 watt a Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s elec trical system can be damaged a Connecting appliances when the engine
325. observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 162 The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information about the steering behaviour to take a break from driving The system recommends a break at speeds of 65 200 km h After the ignition has been switched on the system evaluates the steering be haviour for 15 minutes This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the current steering behaviour If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possible fatigue of the driver it recommends to take a break from driving The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following condi tions is met gt The vehicle is stopped and the ignition is turned off gt The vehicle is stopped the seat belt is taken off and the driver s door is opened gt The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes If none of these conditions is met or the driving style is not changed the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes The system can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment operating instruc tions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 162 The symbol amp will and the following message appear in the instrument cluster display for a few seconds Fatigue detected Take a break DRIVER ALERT TAKE A BR
326. ocks Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and igni tion lock a The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than approx 3 metres away page 238 i Note If you lose a key please contact a specialist garage who will be able to provide you with a new one Unlocking locking with the key HOMS Turning the key for unlocking and locking the vehicle B5E 0024 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 Unlocking gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the direction of arrow A Fig 13 On vehicles with remote control only the driver s door is unlocked Locking gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the direction of arrow B Fig 13 If at least one door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked Unlocking and opening 33 Lock unlock with the remote control Fig 14 Remote control key Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 Explanation of graphic a Unlocking the vehicle amp Locking the vehicle lt s Unlocking the boot lid A Folding out folding up of the key bit Warning light Unlocking The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the
327. ode Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 103 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing ina traffic jam Switching on off gt Press the symbol button The warning light below the button lights up gt Press the symbol button lt again The warning light below the button goes out 104 Using the system Do not switch on Opening Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 109 on page 103 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the symbol button EI WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 05 adjusting 106 Recirculated air mode 106 The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met v A C Fig 110 on page 105 switched on v The engine is running JY The outside temperature above approx 2 C JZ The blower switch is switched on positions 1 6
328. ode will temporarily be switched off If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level the air distribu tion control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior When the automatic air distribution control is switched on an air quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatic recirculated air mode when there is an unpleasant smell you can switch in on manually Switching on off gt Press the symbol button The warning light below the button lights up gt Pres the symbol button again the warning light below the button goes out if necessary press the symbol button AUTO again Switching on and off is also possible in the Infotainment Operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings EJ warninec Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Note a f the windscreen mists up press the symbol button max Press the symbol button AUTO when the windscreen is demisted a The automatic air di
329. olant level is too low add coolant to the reservoir page 214 gt If after adding coolant and switching on the ignition the warning icon disap pears you can continue your journey gt If the coolant level is within the specified range but the warning icon is still lit check the fuse for the radiator fan and replace it if necessary page 246 Fuses in the engine compartment gt If the coolant level and fan fuse are in order but the warning icon is still lid do not continue your journey gt Seek help from a specialist garage Coolant temperature too high If the coolant temperature is too high the warning icon lights up and the fol lowing message appears in the instrument cluster display Engine overheat Stop Log book ENGINE OVERHEAT STOP gt Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine gt Wait until the coolant temperature gauge pointer returns to the operating range page 11 gt Continue your journey only after the warning icon has disappeared EJ warninec Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot the cooling system is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically even if the ignition is off 7 Engine oil pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 When
330. old down the flap Closing gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place Cooling gt Use the rotary switch Fig 71 B to open close the air supply Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or inte rior air to flow into the storage compartment We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cool ing system for the storage compartment is not being used EJ warninec The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons i Note When the stowage compartment is opened a light lights up Storage compartment under the passenger seat Fig 72 Front passenger seat Opening the storage compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 74 Opening gt Pull the handle to position 1 Fig 72 The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow 2 Closing gt Hold the compartment firmly by the handle and shut it in the opposite direction of the arrow 2 Fig 72 gt Keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed F warnine The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea SONS CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg
331. ollowing situations for example When visibility conditions are poor e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall a When driving around sharp bends The camera is blinded by the sun The camera is blinded by the oncoming traffic The viewing range of the camera is impeded by a vehicle traveling ahead a The camera viewing range is obstructed by an obstacle CAUTION Do not attach any stickers or similar objects to the windscreen to avoid impairing the functions of the Assist system Note The system is designed for driving on motorways and roads with adequate lon gitudinal markings The system can detect both continuous and broken lines Operation Fig 148 Windscreen Camera viewing window for Lane Assist B5E 0152 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 158 Lane Assist From here on referred to only as the system helps to keep the vehi cle within the lane The system detects the boundary lines of a lane using the camera Fig 148 When the vehicle approaches a detected line between lanes the system makes a light movement of the steering wheel in the opposite direction to the boundary line This corrective steering intervention can be overridden at any time If the turn signal is switched on prior to driving over the boundary line e g when making a turn no steering intervention takes place when the vehicle approaches the boundary line The syste
332. on Convenience operation of Sliding tilting roof First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 48 The sliding tilting roof can be operated by locking unlocking using the key on the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 35 Closing gt Press and hold the symbol button G on the key or hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the lock position or for the KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 35 H By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor on the KESSY system 1 the closing process is immediately interrupted Tilting roof gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the remote control key EI WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing Note a The sliding tilting roof cannot be opened using the convenience operating fea ture a In case of a fault with the sliding tilting roof seek assistance from a specialist garage 50 Using the system Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Side lights and low beam 52 Daytime running lights DAY LIGHT 52 Turn signal and main beam 53 Automatic driving lamp control 53 Adaptive headlights AFS 54 Headlight assist 55 Fog lights 56 Fog lights with the CORNERfunction 56 Rear fog light 5
333. on The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres If the pointer reaches the reserve marking red area of the scale the control indicator H page 23 lights up CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and exhaust system Note The arrow gt next to the icon R within the fuel gauge displays the installation lo cation of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle Instruments and warning lights TI Counter for distance driven Fig 6 Segment display information display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 Daily trip counter trip The daily trip counter A Fig 6 shows the distance driven since the time the counter was last reset in steps of 100 m Reset trip counter for the distance driven gt Briefly press the button 6 Fig 2 on page 9 Odometer The odometer B Fig 6 indicates the total distance which the vehicle has been driven Setting the time First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 gt Switch on the ignition gt Press and hold the button 6 Fig 2 on page 9 until the Time is shown in the display gt Release the button 6 and the system switches to the time setting function gt Press the button 6 again and set the hours gt Wait a
334. on and safety warn ings H on page 143 The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever page 146 The set speed is stored upon releasing the lever or the button on the button on the lever Set change speed by 10 km h at a timeSPEED Requirements JZ ACCis enabled Increase speed by 1 km h at a time RESUME Requirements J ACCis enabled Vehicle control ensues Decrease speed by 1 km h at a time SET Requirements ACCis enabled Vehicle control ensues Change speed by adopting the current speed ET Requirements vV ACCis enabled v The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored Assist systems 147 i Note a If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator control is temporarily stopped Upon releasing the accelerator control is automatically re sumed a If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake control is stopped Control needs to be restarted in order to resume page 146 a If the vehicle is regulated with a lower speed than that which is stored then upon pressing the button SET the current speed is stored By pressing the button SET again the speed decreases by 1 km h at a time Set time interval level First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 The proximity to the vehicle ahead can be set with the lever Fig 139 on page 146 or in the Infotainment Infotainment manual cha
335. oned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and illumi nates the entry area of the front door The light comes on after the vehicle has been unlocked or on opening the front door The lighting goes out within around 30 seconds after the front door is closed or the ignition is switched on E WARNING If the entry light is on do not touch its cover risk of burns 60 Using the system i Note If the door is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 10 minutes CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen and rear window heater 60 Sun visors 61 Sun screen 61 Windscreen and rear window heater Fig 40 Buttons for the front and rear window heater manual air condition ing system heating Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 60 Explanation of graphic Switching the windscreen heater on off G Switching the rear window heater on off When the heater is switched on a lamp lights up inside or below the button The windscreen and rear window heater only operates when the engine is run The purpose of the note holder B is to store small objects such as a notepad ning etc The windscreen and rear window heater automatically switches off after approxi mately 10 minutes E WARNING iS The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deploy For the sake of
336. oon as the windows start to mist up AI Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 107 Automatic mode 108 Switching the cooling system on off 108 Setting temperature 108 Automatic recirculated air mode 109 Controlling blower 109 Defrosting windscreen 110 The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting of the tem perature of the outflowing air the blower stage and air distribution The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met s A C Fig 111 on page 107 switched on v The engine is running JZ The outside temperature above approx 2 C The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro vide cooling at a high load of the engine cid Note We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once ev ery year Control elements f B5E 0108 Fig 111 Climatronic Control elements Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 Functions of the individual controls Fig 111 A Adjust the temperature for the left side or for both sides page 108 Adjust the blower speed page 109 Adjust the temperature for the right side page 108 Display the temperature setting for the left side Display the temperature setting f
337. oor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings M on page 94 The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor in the lower and upper position gt Raise the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A Fig 101 gt Push the rear edge of the variable loading floor into the grooves B in the direc tion of the arrow The variable loading floor is secured against movements in the grooves B CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Using the net partition behind the rear seats 97 Using the net partition behind the front seats ___ C CSCSCSSSS CSC lt OSF F Removing and refitting the net partition housing 98 EJ warninec a Check that the crossbar of the net partition is hung firmly into the recepta cles D Fig 102 on page 97 and C Fig 104 on page 98 The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use a The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob jects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged Only then can the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function Using the net partition behind the rear seats Fig 102 Folding out part of the roll up lugg
338. or installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi E WARNING Universal approval The category Semi Universal means that the child seat with the ISOFIX system is approved for your vehicle Observe the in a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat formation in the list of vehicles which comes with the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the ap Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the proval Universal and attachment with the TOP TETHER belt locking eyes X The seat is not fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye Onno account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other an chorage points Locking eyes of the TOP TETHER system y Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 191 The locking eyes for attaching the belt to a child seat with the TOP TETHER sys tem are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests Fig 175 192 Safety General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing byhand __ 93 Automatic car wash systems 193 Washing with a high pressure cleaner 194 The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is f
339. or the breakdown kit a Anew bottle of sealant can be purchased from SKODA Original Parts Preparations for using the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 232 The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit gt Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible gt If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal require ments must be observed gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the se lector lever on the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 232 gt If a trailer is connected remove it gt Remove the breakdown kit from the luggage compartment gt Stick the sticker 2 Fig 200 on page 233 on the dash panel in view of the driv er gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean sur face rag paper etc Emergency equipment and self help 233 Sealing and inflating the tyre
340. or the electrical power windows in the rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again Unlocking and opening 45 If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the warning light amp in the safe ty switch S lights up Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors HOSS Button arrangement in the front passenger door B5E 0031 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 44 There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that win dow Opening gt Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the but ton down as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt Lightly press the appropriate button up and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position The window can be completely closed automatically by briefly pressing the but ton up as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately 46 Using the system Force limiter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 44 The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obs
341. or the right side Depending on equipment gt W Switching the auxiliary heater on off page 111 gt OFF Switching Climatronic system off Control the seat heater on the front left seat page 71 Air flow to the windows Air flow to the upper body Air flow in the footwell Switch automatic air distribution control on off page 109 te Control the seat heater on the front right seat page 71 max Switch the intensive windscreen heater on off page 110 G Switch the rear window heater on off page 60 Switch the windscreen heater on off page 60 fo PS H vui o yr Heating and air conditioning system 107 SETUP Adjust Climatronic in the Infotainment DUAL Switch the temperature setting in Dual mode on off page 108 AUTO Switching automatic mode on page 108 A C Switch the cooling system on off page 108 Note The interior temperature sensor is located between the symbol buttons and SETUP Do not stick anything on or cover the sensor otherwise it could have an un favourable effect on the Climatronic Automatic mode mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 Automatic mode works in three modes moderate medium and intensive Setting the individual operating modes operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings Climatronic is set to the medium setting at the factory Recommended setting for all periods of the year gt Set the de
342. orage compartments to avoid damage to the compartments Multifunction box B5E 0252 Fig 94 Multifunction box Insert lateral carrier rail First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 Inserting removing the box gt Remove the box with box hands in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 93 as far as the stop B Insertion takes place in the reverse order Removing inserting the box gt Remove the box with both hands in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 93 after passing the stop B Insertion takes place in the reverse order Inserting removal lateral carrier rails The multifunction box under the luggage compartment cover can be divided by means of two lateral carrier rails A Fig 93 You can insert remove the later carrier rails when the box has been removed as far as the stop B Fig 93 gt Insert the catches on the lateral carrier rail underneath the front edge of the box 3 in the direction of the arrow Fig 94 gt Secure the other side of the lateral carrier rail in the hole 4 the direction of the arrow Removal is carried out in the reverse order CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the multifunction box is 2 5 kg Prevent objects stored in the multifunction box from slipping at all times using the lateral carrier rails Before driving the box must be pushed in so that it is not damaged Seats and useful equipment 93
343. overheat If this happens it will not be possible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating protection has cooled down Opening closing the window from the driver seat Fig 24 Buttons on the driver s door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 44 Opening gt A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button The opening process stops when one releases the button The window fully opens automatically by briefly pressing the button as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt The window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective upper edge of the button The closing process stops when one releases the button The window fully closes automatically by briefly pulling the button as far as the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately Buttons for the electrical power windows Fig 24 A Button for electrical power window of the driver s door Button for electrical power window of the front passenger door Button for electrical power window of the rear right door D Button for electrical power window of the rear left door S Safety pushbutton Safety pushbutton The buttons for electrical power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety pushbutton S Fig 24 The buttons f
344. ow ing engine oils may be used until the next oil change a For petrol engine models ACEA A3 ACEA B4 or API SN API SM a For diesel engine models ACEA C3 or API CJ 4 Checking the oil level Fig 183 Dipstick First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 210 The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine Fig 183 Checking the oil level gt Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil sump and remove the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A No oil must be refilled Oil level within range Oil can be refilled Afterwards the oil level can lie in the range A Inspecting and replenishing 211 Oil level within range Oil must be replenished if the oil level is in the range B or lower The engine consumes a little oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 I 1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5000 kilometres The oil level must be checked at regular intervals We recommend after each time you refuel or pr
345. p starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Note We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a specialist garage Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 215 On disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault free Operation Operating measure Electrical power window operational faults page 47 Operating instructions for Info Enter the radio navigation system code num tainment Radio or Operating ber instructions for Infotainment Navigation Setting the clock page 12 Data in the multifunction display are deleted page 28 Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage in order to en sure full functionality of all electrical systems Automatic load deactivation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 215 The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from discharg ing when the bettery is subjected to heavy loads This manifests itself by the fol lowing gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system gt Where appropriate large convenience consumers e g seat heaters rear win dow heaters have their power limite
346. p time Abort lap Cancel the timer the aborted lap time is not stored End End timing the aborted lap time is stored Evaluate recorded times gt Select the menu item Lap timer Statistics The following information is displayed gt Fastest The fastest lap gt Slowest The slowest lap gt Average The average lap time gt Overall time The total of all the lap times Reset measured times gt Select the menu item Lap timer Statistics Reset EJ warninec Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Only use the Laptimer system when you are in any traffic situation where you have full control over the vehi cle it Note a The system allows the measurement of up to 11 lap times Measurement of each individual lap ends after 99 hrs 59 min and 59 sec Once this time has been reached measurement of the new lap starts automatically a The measured times cannot be reset individually a f the measured times are not reset then these are stored even after turning off the ignition Information display BS5E 0155 Fig 8 Buttons adjustment wheel on the operating lever multifunction steering wheel Fig 9 Operating lever Button to open the menu item wizard First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 The information display provides you with information on th
347. page 240 Fig 12 Key without with remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 Two keys are provided with the vehicle Fig 12 A Keys without remote control B Keys with remote control remote control keys The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The operating range of the remote control key is approx 30 m But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak The remote control key has a fold open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after the receiver unit is repaired or replaced Only then can the remote control key be used again EJ warnine a Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle even if it is only for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk of accident CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe sh
348. peed e g during a traffic jam or when tuning and remains stationary after pressing the brake pedal lightly Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force Operating conditions of the system Fig 145 Instrument cluster display En gine shut down is not currently available 24 0 c trip First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 The START STOP system is very complex Some of the procedures are hard to check without servicing No engine shut down is carried out Before each STOP phase the system checks whether certain conditions have been met No engine shut down takes place in the following situations gt The engine has not reached the minimum temperature for START STOP mode gt The temperature inside the vehicle has not reached the desired temperature set in the air conditioning system heating gt The external temperature is very low high gt The windscreen heater is switched on gt The intensive windscreen heater Climatronic or windscreen heater ventilation is switched on with the maximum air temperature setting manual air condition ing system gt The parking aid Park Assist is switched on gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The stationary vehicle is on a steep slope or a steep downhill section gt The idling speed is too high The warning icon amp Fig 145 appears in the displ
349. peration 159 Activating deactivating 160 Explanation of situations 160 Information messages 160 gt EI warnine Lane Assist only operates as a support it does absolve the driver of the re sponsibility to maintain full control over the vehicle s steering a Lane Assist only makes the driver away that the vehicle is approaching the line between two lanes by means of a steering intervention The driver retains responsibility at all times for keeping the vehicle within the lane Lane Assist can help you keep the vehicle within the lane However it does not steer the vehicle for you The driver retains full responsibility for steering at all times a The camera need not be able to detect all lane lines A steering intervention can only be made when the vehicle approaches a detected line between lanes a Some objects on the road may be incorrectly detected as lines As a result an incorrect steering intervention may take place a The function of adaptive lane guidance Assist system may be restricted when driving e g over rutted roads on a slope or if there are lateral winds Do not use the assist system in poor weather e g black ice fog heavy rain risk of accident EJ warnine The detection capability of the camera may be limited by various external in fluences In such cases the assistant may not detect the line between two lanes at all or not properly The detection capability of the camera may be re stricted in the f
350. play page 26 Engine compartment overview J B5E 0014 Fig 181 Principle sketch Engine compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 206 1 Coolant expansion reservoir 213 2 Engine oil dipstick 211 3 Engine oil filler opening 212 4 Brake fluid reservoir 214 5 Battery below a cover 215 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 209 6 fis Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical Radiator fan First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 206 After switching off the ignition the fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor Operation is controlled accord ing to the temperature of the coolant Windscreen washer system Fig 182 Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid reservoir B5E 0039 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 206 The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the head light cleaning system The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 4 7 litres on vehicles that have a headlight cleaning system Inspecting and replenishing 209 Clear water is no
351. posite the direction of travel gt Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 226 C gt Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction of the arrow 2 Install gt Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely gt Insert the light into the brackets in the body Fig 226 D gt Carefully press the tail lamp assembly into the bodywork so that the bolts 1 Fig 227 on page 251 on the light latch with the mounts in the body M Be careful not to pinch the cable bundle between the bodywork and light gt Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover gt Ensure that the cover engages firmly gy CAUTION First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 247 a Ensure that the cable bundle is not pinched between the bodywork and the light as it is refitted there is a risk of damage to the electric installation and wa Outer part of the light l l ter ingress gt Turn the bulb holder 2 Fig 227 anti clockwise remove it from the lamp hous a If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has been pinched we recommend Ing l l l that you have the connection of the light checked by a specialist garage gt Turn the faulty bulb in the holder anti clockwise to the stop and remove gt Insert a new bulb in the holder and turn clockwis
352. position you will need to remove them page 69 After removing the child seat re install the head restraints i Note We recommend that you use child seats from SKODA Original Accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODAvehicles They meet the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Never use a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat which is protected by an active airbag installed in front of it This could cause serious injury to the child even death B5E 0255 Fig 172 Stickers on the B column on the passenger side sticker on the passenger s sun visor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 188 For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible The following advice must be heeded when using a child seat in which the child is carried on the front passenger seat gt It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel I gt If possible adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the back of the child seat gt If possible move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it
353. pper part of the head Setting height gt Hold the front head restraints on the sides with both hands press and hold the safety button A Fig 51 and move the head restraints into position gt Hold the rear head restraints on the sides with both hands and move them up wards Fig 51 To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the safety button 1 with one hand and press the head restraint downwards with the other hand The head restraints and the front seats must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers page 172 Correct seated position Removing installing Only the real head restraints may be removed gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop gt Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 51 simultaneously press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flat screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place F warnine a The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident a Never drive with the head restraints removed risk of injury a f the rear seats are occupied the respective rear head re
354. proval of the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty Service schedule SKODA Service Partners First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 SKODA Service Partners feature modern specially developed tools and equip ment Here trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of SKODA Original Parts and SKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifications re pairs and technical alterations All SKODA service partners operate according to the most recent guidelines and instructions from KODA AUTO a s All service and repair work is therefore carried out on time and at the appropriate quality Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good techni cal condition SKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle and to provide quality work We therefore advise you to have all modifications re pairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Spoiler First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 200 If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid the following instructions must be adhered to gt For safety reasons the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the associated spoile
355. pter Vehicle settings CAR button Setting by means of the lever gt Flick the switch DISTANCE into the sprung position or set Fig 139 on page 146 The display of the instrument cluster shows line 2 Fig 137 on page 145 which indicates the proximity gt Using the switch DISTANCE on the lever adjust line 2 to the desired proximity lev el i Note a f the proximity is changed in the infotainment the change will only come into effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC a The proximity is dependent on the speed The higher the speed the greater the proximity to the vehicle ahead On wet roads a longer time interval to the vehicle ahead should always be se lected than on dry roads 148 Driving Special driving conditions Fig 140 Special conditions Cornering narrow vehicles or vehicles travel ling side by side B5E 0243 Fig 141 Special conditions Lane changes of other vehicles stationary vehi cles First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 143 The following and similar situations require special attention of the driver When cornering When driving around long bends the ACC may respond to a vehicle in the adjacent lane Fig 140 A Your own vehicle is regulated with respect to this vehicle and will no longer respond to the vehicle ahead In such cases control should be disabled by accelerating applying the brake
356. r folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob jects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged Only then can the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function CAUTION Before folding the seat backrest forward from the luggage compartment check that there are no objects on the rear seat When folding the seat backrest for ward they could be damaged or cause damage to the seat backrest and the seat a Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests 1 Ifthe front seats are too far back we recommend that you have the rear head restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled 74 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Car park ticket holder SSS Y 5 Storage compartment on the driver s side 75 Storage compartments in the doors 76 Holder for reflective vest 7 Storage compartment in the front centre console 77 Cup holders 77 Cigarette lighter _ SB Ashtray 78 12 volt power o
357. r from his her responsibility for park ing in and manoeuvring out of the parking space a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on parking in and ma noeuvring out of the parking space Under adverse conditions this can cause objects or people to not be recognized by the system When parking in and manoeuvring out of parking spaces the system auto matically executes quick steering movements While it is doing so do not place your hands between the steering wheel risk of injury When parking or leaving a parking space on loose or slippery surfaces grav el snow ice etc you may stray from the calculated road because of the sur face conditions Therefore we suggest that you do not use the system in such situations CAUTION a f other vehicles are parked behind the kerb or on it the system can also guide your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it Ensure that the wheels or the wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time a Under certain circumstances surfaces or structures of certain objects such as wire mesh fences or powder snow cannot be recognised by the system a The evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size approved by the manufacturer a If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted the re sulting posit
358. r on the luggage compart ment lid gt This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own in combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid gt We recommend that you consult the SKODA Service Partner for any repairs to or replacement addition or removal of spoilers Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 201 EI warnine If work on your vehicle s spoilers is not carried out properly this can lead to operational faults risk of accident and serious injuries Component protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Some electronic vehicle components such as the instrument cluster are factory equipped with component protection The component protection was developed as a protection mechanism for gt impairment of factory or garage fitted electronic components after installation in another vehicle for example after a theft gt impairment of electronic components used outside the vehicle gt the possibility of a legitimate installation or change of electronic components for repairs at a specialist garage The activated component protection can be realized by functional limitations of the specific electronic component Seek help from a specialist garage Airbags First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on pa
359. railer load braked kg 1500 1800 1700 2000 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 640 650 650 650 6607 660 710 a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 2 0 Itr 105 kW TDI engine OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE DSG6 Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 16002 1800 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 260 Technical data 2 0 Itr 110 kW TDI engine 110 3500 4000 320 1750 3000 4 1968 OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG6 OCTAVIAESTATE MG6 OCTAMMA ESTATE OCTAVIA ESTATE MGS Top speed km h 218 215 216 213 213 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 5 8 6 8 6 8 7 8 7 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1600 1800 2000 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 660 670 670 680 720 a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 2 0 Itr 135 kW TDI engine OCTAVIA RS MG6 OCTAVIA RS DSG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE MG6 OCTAVIA ESTATE DSG6 Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Applies to vehicles with a Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 Technical data 261
360. raking is not neces sary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear Information for braking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system consid ers the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically Starting off and Driving 119 After the speed was reduced below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stopped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again Before driving a long distance at a steep incline reduce speed and shift into the next lowest gear As a result the braking effect of the engine will be used reduc ing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed intermit tently not continuously Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted If operated under severe conditions the thickness of the brake pads must be checked by a specialist garage between service appointments as well Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be d
361. re of the interior of your vehicle we recommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA service partner Note Natural leather First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 198 Leather is a natural material with specific properties and requires regular clean ing and maintenance Depending on the amount of wear and tear the leather should be cleaned ona regular basis Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials This leads to severe corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water dampened cotton or woollen cloth and then dry with a clean dry cloth H Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution 2 table spoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water To remove stains use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather care product CAUTION a Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that no water gets into the seams Otherwise the leather could become brittle or cracked a Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for le
362. re only unlocked af ter being opened again Unlocking the vehicle with the KESSY system This function enables you to unlock all the doors individual doors both doors on the left or right vehicle side The other doors the fuel filler flap and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened again Automatic locking unlocking All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km h The button in the handle of the boot lid is deactivated If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by press ing the central locking button 6 The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on the door opening lever 36 Using the system Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside Fig 16 Central locking button B5E 0025 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 If the vehicle was not locked from the outside you can also unlock or lock it with the button Fig 16 without the ignition switched on While a door is opened the vehicle cannot be locked Locking gt Press the button 6 Fig 16 The symbol 6 in the button comes on Unlocking gt Press the button 6 Fig 16 The symbol 6 in the button is no longer illuminated The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is no
363. re products to parts of the bodywork that come into contact with door seals or window guides Plastic parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 194 Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts use cleaning products specially designed for this purpose CAUTION Do not use paint care products on plastic parts Rubber seals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 All door seals and window guides are factory treated with a colourless matt var nish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect against driving noise Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products CAUTION Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating and driving noise may occur Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 195 Chrome parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment risk of surface scratches Decorative films First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 Wash the films wit
364. rectly below the engraving in the lower sill gt Insert the crank into the mount on the car jack page 228 gt Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up until its claw is positioned below the vertical web of the lower sill gt Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web Fig 198 B gt Support the base plate of the jack with its entire surface resting on level ground and ensure that the lever is located in a vertical position to the area where the claw grasps the web Fig 198 A Emergency equipment and self help 231 gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground E WARNING a Only raise the vehicle at the attachment points Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle Securing wheels against theft Fig 199 Principle sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 229 The anti theft wheel bolts can only be removed tightended with the aid of the adapter page 228 Vehicle tool kit gt Insert the adapter B Fig 199 with its toothed side fully into the inner tooth ing of the safety wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer hexagon is jutting out gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop a Make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the ad
365. rent gear indication Fig 7 Bl For instance if 4 5 appears in this display this means it is recommended that you shift from 4th into 5th gear FI warnine The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driv ing situations such as overtaking Door luggage compartment or bonnet warning First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 If at least one door is open or the boot or bonnet is open the display indicates the relevant open door or boot bonnet An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km h 26 Using the system Eco tips First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 To minimise fuel consumption fuel economy tips can appear in the display Eco tips are indicated next to the letters ECO TIP For instance if the air condition is on and a window is open the following mes sage appears ECO TIP Air conditioning switched on close windows Eco tips display must be activated in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Laptimer Stopwatch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 The Laptimer function offers the possibility of calculating the lap time for exam ple when driving on a race course The calculated time is displayed in the informa tion displ
366. requent washing How often the vehicle should be washed depends for example on the following factors gt Frequency of use gt Parking situation garage below trees etc gt Season of the year gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays accentuate this caustic effect It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter F WARNING a When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the braking sys tem can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off risk of accident CAUTION Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage SA For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Washing by hand First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 193 Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only use a car shampoo for stubborn di
367. res These characteristics are mainly v Increased driving stability J Reduced risk of aquaplaning JV Reduced tyre noise and reduced tyre wear Tyre control display Fig 190 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value B5E 0075 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 Calibration After changing the tyre inflation pressure page 221 H in section Introduction after changing one or several wheels the position of a wheel on the vehicle or when the warning light lights up while driving a calibration of the system must be carried out as follows gt Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 221 gt Switch on the ignition gt Start the system calibration On vehicles with Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chap ter Vehicle settings CAR button On vehicles with the radio preinstallation gt Press and hold the symbol button i Fig 190 for longer than 2 seconds While pressing the button 1 the indicator light illuminates At the same time the system memory is cleared and the new calibration process is started This is confirmed by an acoustic signal followed by the warning light U going off If the warning light does not go out after the calibration this indicates a sys tem fault Seek help from a specialist garage Tyre pressure indicator The warning light 1 lights up wh
368. riving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed gt Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls gt Never drive when your driving ability is impaired e g through medication alco hol or drugs gt Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit gt Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather conditions gt Take regular breaks on long journeys at least every two hours CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position for the driver 173 Correct seated position for the front passenger 173 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 174 Examples of an incorrect seated position 174 172 Safety EI WARNING Observe the following instructions for the proper seated position a At all times the front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to match the person s body size and the seat belt must be attached properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to passengers a f the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag a If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt
369. rmation cluster display Release the handbrake RELEASE HANDBRAKE Fault with automatic gearbox Consult a specialist garage for help Braking system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low The following message is shown in the information cluster display Brake fluid Log book BRAKE FLUID PLEASE CHECK Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 214 H If the warning light lights up together with the warning light there is a problem with the ABS Instruments and warning lights 15 EI warnine a If the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light page 17 Antilock brake system ABS do not continue your jour ney Seek help from a specialist garage A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident A Seat belt warning light front First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light 4 comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt The warning light 4 goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened their seat belt If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle speed
370. rming an emergency locking unlocking Locking a door Fig 208 Rear door Emergency locking B5E 0078 240 Do it yourself Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 239 An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after opening the door gt Remove the panel A Fig 208 gt Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the di rection of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors gt Replace the cover After closing the door it cannot be opened from the outside The door is unlocked by pulling on the door opening lever and is then opened from the outside Unlocking the tailgate B5E 0211 Fig 209 Emergency unlocking Octavia Octavia Estate AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 239 Unlocking Octavia gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 73 gt Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the stop Fig 209 Al gt Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow gt Open the luggage compartment lid Unlocking Octavia Estate gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 73 gt Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening of the trim as far as it goes Fig 209 B gt Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow
371. rning icons amp and A are lit in conjunction with the following message on the display the engine oil level sensor is defective Oil sensor Workshop OILSENSOR WORKSHOP Seek help from a specialist garage 22 Using the system EI warnine Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the prevailing conditions Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage Bulb failure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 The warning icon comes on if a bulb is faulty The following message is shown in the information cluster display for example Check right dipped headlight beam DIPPED HEADLIGHT CHECK RIGHT gt Diesel particle filter diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a reg ular basis If the warning icon lights up soot has accumulated in the diesel particulate filter To clean the diesel particle filter and where traffic conditions permit E drive for at least 15 minutes or until the warning icon goes out as follows gt 4 or gear 5 engaged automatic gearbox Position D S gt Vehicle speed at least 60 km h gt Engine speed between 1800
372. rning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the following mes sage is displayed on the display Apply the brake to start APPLY BRAKE Stopping the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 Fig 116 on page 115 For vehicle with an automatic gearbox the ignition key can only be pulled out if the selector lever is in the position P 116 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking and locking the steering KESSY __ CSCSC lt iTYT Switching on the ignition 118 Starting the engine 118 Switching off the igniton CBG Switching off the engine 118 Emergency start up of the engine 119 Emergency ignition shutoff system SSS The KESSY system makes it possible to switch the ignition on off and to start stop the engine without actively using the key A key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering switch on the steering and Start the vehicle EI warnine Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle This is particu larly important if children are left in the vehicle Otherwise the children could for example start the engine risk of accident or injury a Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases of the engine contain besides the odourless a
373. ro gramme is automatically selected Avoiding full throttle 1 100 km alee 125 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h km h 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 The slower you drive the more the fuel savings Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consump tion but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehi cle The maximum speed of your vehicle should as far possible never be used Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds The Fig 125 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle Fuel consumption will be halved if only three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle is used Reducing idling First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 Idling also costs fuel In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times Even after just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again Starting off and Driving 127 If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions thoug
374. round 4 seconds the system switches to the minutes setting gt Press the button 6 again and set the minutes The time can also be set in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotain ment chapter Unit setup 12 Using the system Viewing the charge level vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 gt Switch off the ignition gt Press and hold the button 6 Fig 2 on page 9 until the Battery status or BAT TERY SOC is shown in the display gt Release the button 6 the current charge level of the vehicle battery is dis played in Service interval display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 Messages before reaching the scheduled service date Before reaching the service date the icon appears in the display after the igni tion is switched on as well as the following message for example Oil change in Days OIL CHANGE IN DAYS or Inspection in Days INSPECT_IN DAYS The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or where applicable days until the service due date is reached Messages upon reaching scheduled service date Once the service interval is reached the icon amp appears in the display after the ignition is switched on as well as the following message for example Oil change now OILCHANGE NOW or Inspection
375. rt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leath er CAUTION a When washing the car by hand protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts e g when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims etc There is a risk of cuts Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Automatic car wash systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 193 The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system e g closing the windows and the sliding tilting roof etc Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 193 If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts such as a spoiler roof rack system two way radio aerial etc it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand After an automatic wash with wax treatment the lips of the wipers should be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose and then de greased FI WARNING Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system Never manually fold in electric exterior mirrors always use the electric controls Washing with a h
376. s H on page 14 The warning light 0 comes on when the fog lights are operating Further information page 56 Cruise control system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light comes on when the cruise control is active Further information page 141 Instruments and warning lights 19 Selector lever lock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up operate the brake pedal Further information page 122 o Main beam First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light comes on when the main beam is selected or when the headlight flasher is operated Further information page 53 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Q 4 Rear seat belt warning gt o gt Y z f Alternator 21 Coolant 21 7 Engine oil pressure S O Engine oil level 22 Bulb failure 22 Diesel particle filter diesel engine gt 2 Windscreen washer fluid level 23 D Fuel reserve 23 Headlight assist 8B B START STOP system 23 amp Ice warning 24 The warning icons indicate the status of certain functions or faults The warning icons are indicated in the display of the instrument cluster page 10 20 Using the system
377. s at least 25 cm Adjust the distance between the legs and the dash panel in the knee airbag area so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm B Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidently change during the journey risk of accident Starting off and Driving 113 Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig 115 Adjustable steering wheel Lever below steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted gt First of all adjust the driver s seat page 67 gt Pull the lever below the steering wheel down Fig 115 gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop Power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the en gine is not running e g vehicle being towed in However greater physical effort is required to turn the steering wheel Steering force assistance can be
378. s cannot be used on the spare wheel CAUTION a f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 224 Spare wheel a Protect the tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel a Replace lost dust caps a f in the event of a puncture it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre without a dedicated running direction or the opposite running direction drive carefully as the optimum characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situation SA For the sake of the environment Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption i Note a We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe cialist garage a We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Accessories Service life of tyres Fig 188 Principle sketch Tyre tread with wear indicators Open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre size and tyre inflation pressure Fig 189 Changing wheels around First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 The life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure driving style and other cir cumstances Following the advice below can extend the service life of your tyres Tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey
379. s in position AUTO and if automatic wiping in rain or wiping posi tion 2 or 3 is switched on for longer than 30 seconds page 63 the side lights and low beam will switch on automatically The light switches off when automatic wiping wiping position 2 or 3 is not switched on for longer than approx 4 seconds Lights and visibility 53 The automatic headlight control in rain can be activated deactivated in the Info tainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button CAUTION Do not affix any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the wind screen so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled Adaptive headlights AFS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 The AFS system works in tandem with automatic driving lamp control AUTO please read the following page 53 The AFS system makes sure the street remains lit up depending on the traffic and weather situation The system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle based on the vehicle speed whether the windscreen wipers are in use the rear fog lights and data from Infotainment Navigation The AFS system can work only if the following condition is met v The light switch is in the position AUTO The AHL system operates in the following modes Out of town mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam
380. s in your vehi cle for safety reasons in the event of an accident this can get damaged and fuel may escape risk of fire CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork risk of paint damage 204 General Maintenance Fig 178 Fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines B5E 0181 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 204 Before refuelling switch off the auxiliary heating system auxiliary heating and ventilation page 111 gt Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 177 A gt Open the flap manually in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Turn the filler cap counterclockwise gt Remove the filler cap and place the it into the bore of the fuel filler flap Fig 177 B gt Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time H gt Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler tube and put it back in the pump gt gt Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it clockwise until it securely engages gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check tha
381. sensor can distinguish objects by radiating and receiving electromagnetic waves The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following gt The sensor is covered by mud snow or debris for example gt The sensor or its immediate surroundings are covered by other objects for ex ample a sticker is attached gt When visibility is poor e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall If the sensor is dirty or does not have visibility for any other reason the follow ing message appears in the instrument cluster display ACC No sensor visibility Stop the car switch off the engine and clean the sensor or eliminate the obstacle causing the lack of visibility Should the ACC still be unavailable after the engine is restarted push the lever into position OFF Fig 139 on page 146 Seek help from a specialist garage E WARNING Operation a If you suspect that the sensor is damaged deactivate the ACC Have the sensor checked by a specialist garage The sensor can become misaligned by collisions or by damage to the front of the vehicle the wheel arch or the underside of the vehicle This can lead to an impairment of the ACC function risk of accidents If this is the case have the sensor checked by a specialist garage a Any improperly carried out work to the front of the vehicle may cause the sensor to become misaligned We therefore recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations carrie
382. serve the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Start the engine manually START MANUALLY The driver sees this message when the conditions for the automatic start proce dure are not met during the STOP phase The engine must be started manual ly page 116 Error start stop system START STOP ERROR Error in the START STOP system Seek help from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Selecting driving mode _ 5G Mode Normal 157 Mode Sport 157 Mode Eco __ SS Mode Individual 157 Selecting the driving mode allows you to adjust a range of different driving pa rameters for the vehicle The set driving mode remains stored even after switching the ignition on and off 156 Driving EI warninec a Setting the driving mode while driving can distract you from other traffic risk of accident a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle a Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions Note The driver can change some vehicle functions irrespective of the selected driving mode For instance in the driving mode Eco the driver can switch the automatic transmission to the mode S Selecting driving mode Fig 147
383. sired temperature we recommend 22 C gt Press the symbol button AUTO Fig 111 on page 107 gt Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 Fig 107 on page 102 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards After the automatic mode is switched on Climatronic works in the last selected mode The currently selected mode is displayed in the Infotainment display Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air distribution or by increasing decreasing the blower speed Switching the cooling system on off AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 gt Press the symbol button A C 108 Using the system The warning light in the button lights up gt Press the symbol button A C again The warning light in the button goes out After the cooling system is switched off only the ventilation function remains ac tive whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is the outside tem perature Setting temperature mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or to gether For both sides gt Turn the control dial A Fig 111 on page 107 to the left or right to increase or decrease the temperature The warning light in the symbol button DUAL does not light up For the right side gt Turn the control dial C Fig 111 on page 107 to the left or ri
384. sition AUTO 20 or 2 Fig 33 gt Pull the light switch to position 1 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on page 14 Fog lights with the CORNERfunction First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 The CORNER function improves illumination of the vehicle surroundings when turning parking and the like by switching on the fog lights on the respective side of the vehicle 1 If both switch on conditions are conflicting for example if the front wheels are turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority 56 Using the system The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met v The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to the right or left The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km h The engine is running The daytime running lights are not switched on The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position AUTO and the low beam is switched on v The fog lights are not switched on The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear S SSS Note Rear fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 51 Switching on off g
385. specially in the following cases gt High external temperatures gt Longer day trips gt After each charge Winter time The vehicle battery only has a proportion of the starting power in lower tempera tures A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be low 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary re charged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter CAUTION For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte lev el cannot be checked The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the inspection service Inspecting and replenishing 217 Charging a vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 215 A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Only when performing a quick charge disconnect both battery cables first of all negative then positive gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red posi tive black negative gt Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device gt After charging has been successful Switch off the charger and remove the mains cable from the power socket gt Only then discon
386. st garage O Error ACC There is an ACC system error Push the lever into position OFF Seek help from a specialist garage Speed limit Increase the speed accordingly and start control page 146 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Instructions and Information 150 Radar sensor 150 Operation 151 Activating deactivating 152 City Emergency braking 152 Information messages 153 Assist systems 149 The area monitoring system From here on only referred to as Front Assist warns you of the danger of a collision with an obstacle in front of the vehicle and tries to avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying the brakes as appropriate EI WARNING a Front Assist only works as an aid it does absolve the driver of the responsi bility to maintain full control over the vehicle s steering a Front Assist has physical and system related limitations For this reason the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system responses in certain situations You should therefore always be alert and ready to intervene a Always adapt your speed and safety proximity to the vehicle ahead to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions a f Front Assist gives a warning then depending on the traffic situation im mediately slow down the car by applying the brakes or avoid the obstacle The increased safety through the Front Assi
387. st not have stickers attached be covered or modi fied in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup holders mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel Fig 165 A be located within their immediate vicinity Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the stowage compartment Fig 165 B When the airbags are deployed they inflate in front of the driver and front pas senger Fig 166 D The forward movement of the driver and of the front pas senger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced 182 Safety Driver s knee airbag Side airbags B5E 0139 Fig 167 Driver s knee airbag below the steering column Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 181 Fig 169 Inflated side airbags The driver s knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver s legs The driver s knee airbag A
388. st system must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of accident a The driver must always be ready to take over steering of the vehicle himself brake or accelerate a Front Assist does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects Instructions and Information First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 Front Assist may become impaired in the following situations for example gt When visibility is poor e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall gt Driving around sharp bends gt When fully pressing down the accelerator pedal gt If there is a fault with the Front Assist system gt When one of the brake assist systems e g ESC intervenes EI WARNING In the following situations Front Assist should be switched off for safety rea sons a When the vehicle is being towed away 150 Driving I WARNING Continued When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench a When an undesired activation has repeatedly occurred a When on a truck train or a car ferry service or the like l CAUTION Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side are not detected by Front As sist via the radar sensor until they are within the sensor s range This is especially true for narrow vehicles such as motorcycles Note In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electrically connected trailer Front Assist not available Radar s
389. storage compart ment B5E 0006 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Open close gt Press on the lid edge A Fig 63 in the direction of the arrow Closing takes place in the reverse order The phone box may be located in the stowage compartment Infotainment man ual chapter Phonebox EJ warninc Never use the storage compartment as an ashtray or for the storage of com bustible materials risk of fire and damage to the storage compartment Cup holders Fig 64 Cup holder in the front centre console in the rear armrest First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder A Cup holder in front centre console Cup holder in rear armrest Removable element D Removable element You can change the size of the individual openings using the removable elements c and D EJ wAaRNING a Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding a Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the elec trical components or seat upholstery Seats and usefu
390. straint must not be in the lower position i Note a For the sports seats the head restraints are integrated into the front seat backrests These headrests cannot be adjusted by height or removed a The middle rear head restraint is only adjustable in two positions Seats and useful equipment 69 Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat Fig 52 Memory buttons and SET button B5E 0003 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 67 The memory function for the driver s seat provides the option to store the posi tions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors Each of the three memory but tons B Fig 52 can be assigned a set position Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward gt Switch on the ignition gt Adjust the seat to the desired position gt Adjust both of the exterior mirrors page 66 gt Press the button A Fig 52 gt Within cae after pressing the button press the desired memory button B An acknowledgment sound confirms the storage Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the required memory button B Fig 52 gt Move the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control into position R page 66 gt Engage reverse gear gt Adjust the front passenger s mirror to the desired position page 66 gt Take the vehicle out of gear The set positio
391. stribution control operates only if the outside temperature is higher than approx 2 C Controlling blower AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 The blower stage can be manually adapted to suit your particular needs gt Turn the control dial B Fig 111 on page 107 to the left or right to increase or decrease the blower speed If the blower speed is reduced to a minimum Climatronic is switched off The set blower speed is displayed in the control dial B when the respective num ber of warning lights come on EJ warnine a Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary a Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up Heating and air conditioning system 109 Defrosting windscreen mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 107 Switching on off gt Press the symbol button max Fig 111 on page 107 gt Press the symbol button max again or press the symbol button AUTO More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 Fig 107 on page 102 The tempera ture control is controlled automatically CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching on off SSS M Radio remote control m1 Conditions
392. sure that the loop around fit tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side a Once the child seat in which the child is transported with the back to the direction of travel is no longer used in the passenger seat the front passen ger airbag should be switched on again Transporting children safely 189 Child safety and side airbag lt a Fig 173 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured risk from the side airbag Child properly protected by safety seat BNH 0113 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 188 The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side air bag Fig 173 A There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag so that the airbag can provide as much protection as possi ble Fig 173 B FI WARNING a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags risk of injury Classification of child seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 188 Classification of child seats according to the ECE R 44 standard 190 Safety Soup _ _Weight ofth
393. switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned po sition Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position A gt Press the switch in the region of the lug E towards the roof Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Fig 26 gt Press the switch on the recess E down and then pull it forwards Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter The sliding tilting roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because there is something in the way e g ice The sliding tilting roof can be fully closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess E down and then pushing it forward until the sliding tilting roof is fully closed E E WARNING When closing the sliding tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries risk of injury l CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism Convenience operation of Sliding tilting roof First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 47 The sliding tilting roof can be operated by locking unlocking using the key or us ing the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 35 Closing The sliding tilting roof can be closed as follows 48 Using the system gt Press and hold the sym
394. t Turn the light switch into position AUTO or 20 Fig 33 on page 56 gt Pull the light switch to position 2 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights the rear fog light is switched on by pull ing out the light switch directly to the position 2 This switch only has one posi tion The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is switched on page 14 Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory fitted towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer COMING HOME LEAVING HOME First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 51 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME hereafter referred to only as function makes it possible to automatically switch on the lights for a short time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle in poor visibility The function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met JV The light switch is in the position AUTO Fig 31 on page 53 v The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced v The ignition is switched off The function and duration of the lighting can be activated or deactivated in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings button CAR The light is regulated based on data gathered by the lig
395. t Radio and or the Infotain ment navigation system The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only inten ded for general information The service schedule gt Contains vehicle data including information on service work carried out gt Is intended as proof of services carried out gt Is intended for records relating to the mobility warranty only valid for some countries gt Serves as a warranty certificate from the SKODA Partner where your vehicle was purchased Therefore please always present the service schedule when you take your vehicle to a specialist garage If the service schedule is missing or in poor condition please contact the special ist garage that regularly services your vehicle You will need to request a dupli cate in which the specialist garage will confirm the service work previously car ried out The Help on the Road brochure The brochure contains the important emergency telephone numbers as well as telephone numbers and contact addresses of SKODA Partners in different coun tries Abbreviations Using the system Cockpit Overview Instruments and warning lights Instrument cluster Warning lights Warning icons in the display Information system Driver information system Driving data Multifunction display Unlocking and opening Unlocking and locking KESSY Anti theft alarm system Luggage compartment
396. t a speed of more than 30 km h 158 Driving In critical driving situations e g during emergency braking or a sudden change in direction the following steps can be taken separately or combined in order to re duce the risk of serious injury gt The front passenger s and driver s seatbelts if worn are automatically ten sioned closely over the body gt The windows in the side doors if open are automatically closed up to a gap of about 5 cm from the edge gt The sliding tilting roof is closed Once the critical driving situation has passed the tension on the seatbelts will be released again The system operates at two levels of protection The first level of protection The system already intervenes in situations that may occur during dynamic driv ing As aresult this primarily helps to keep the driver and the passenger in the correct seated position The first level of protection can be deactivated by one of the following measures gt Deactivation of the system in Infotainment Operating instructions for Info tainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button gt Deactivation of TCS page 133 gt Selecting the driving mode Sport page 156 The second level of protection The system intervenes only if the situation is evaluated as critical such as in pan ic braking at high speeds This level of protection cannot be deactivated This chapter contains information on the following subjects O
397. t be interlocked in the holders of the side trim panel 2 The items which are transported must not exceed the height of the luggage compartment cover The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com partment lid when it is in the opened position There must be no object in the gap between the opened cover and the rear backrest Opening the boot lid also lifts up the boot cover Roll up luggage compartment cover Octavia Estate Fig 88 Pull out and remove the roll up luggage compartment cover roll up roll up luggage compartment cover 90 Using the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 Pulling out gt Grasp the cover on the handle A Fig 88 and pull it out in the direction of the arrow 1 until it clicks Folding gt Push the cover in the area of the handle A Fig 88 in the direction of the ar row 2 The cover rolls up automatically Removing inserting The fully rolled up luggage compartment cover can be removed e g for the transport of bulky objects gt Push on the side of the crossbar in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 88 and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 4 Insertion takes place in the reverse order The removed luggage compartment cover can be stowed in the storage compart ment under the variable loading floor page 91 Stowing roll up luggage com partment cover and roof racks
398. t in the opposite direction of the arrow 4 gt Insert the brake rod and lock it against the arrow 3 with a screwdriver gt Push in the side cover against the direction of the arrow 2 gt Press the side cover fully against the direction of the arrow 1 gt Close the storage compartment Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel No Fig 215 Schematic representation of the fuse box First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 243 Power consumer Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Data bus control unit Alarm sensor Control unit for the air conditioning system heating receiver for re mote control for the auxiliary heating selector lever for the automatic gearbox relay for the rear window heater replay for the windscreen heater Light switch rain sensor diagnostic socket Haldex clutch Touchscreen Heated rear seats Radio Belt tensioner driver s side Air blower for air conditioning heating Power consumer 15 Electric steering lock 16 Signal amplifier for telephone telephone preinstallation 17 Instrument cluster 18 Not assigned 19 KESSY control unit 20 Steering wheel module 21 Not assigned 22 Luggage compartment door opening 23 Light right 24 Panorama roof 25 Control unit for centra
399. t maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper ly protect you hazard a Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes nec essary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is de ployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi tion Correct seated position for the driver Fig 159 Correct seated position for the driver correct head restraint posi tion First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 172 For your own Safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the steering wheel so that there is a gap of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the chest A Fig 159 and that the distance between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag is at least 10 cm B gt Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs 1 Not valid for sport seats gt Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is a
400. t possible to open the doors or the luggage compartment lid from the outside safety feature e g when stopping at traffic lights etc gt The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of the respective door gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle EJ WARNING a Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the ve hicle in an emergency danger to life a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Kp Note If the safelock system is switched on page 35 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate Child safety lock Fig 17 Child safety locks on the rear doors B5E 0074 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 32 The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Switching on gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow Fig 17 mirror inverted on the right doors Switching off gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig 17 mirror inverted on the right doors Opening closing a door B5E 0121 Fig 18 Door
401. t read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is with drawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The following message is shown in the information cluster display Immobilizer active 8 IMMOBILIZER ACTIVE Ignition lock Fig 116 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock B5E 0104 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 Petrol engines Fig 116 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Diesel engines Fig 116 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switched off the steer ing can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starting engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and the key cannot or can only be turned with difficulty into the position 2 Fig 116 move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock Starting the engine First read and observe the introductory information and s
402. t sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights We recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner from the range of SKODA Original Accessories in winter additionally with antifreeze which is capable of removing stubborn dirt In Winter the washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze even if the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C CAUTION a Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a f the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid a Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re plenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be conta minated which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Specifications and capacity 211 Checking the oil level 211 Replenishing 212 Changing 212 The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use through
403. t the same level as the upper part of your head c gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 175 Using seat belts Manual driver seat adjustment page 68 Electrical driver seat adjustment page 68 Correct seated position for the front passenger First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 172 For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head C Fig 159 on page 173 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 175 In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated page 185 Deactivating airbags Manual front passenger adjustment page 68 Electrical front passenger seat adjustment page 68 Passive Safety 173 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 172 To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an ac cident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following gt Adjust t
404. t the fuel filler flap is closed properly Incorrect refuelling guard on vehicles with diesel engines The fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines has been fitted with a incor rect refuelling guard Fig 178 This guard means it is only possible to refuel with the diesel pump nozzle If the diesel pump nozzle does not sit directly in the fuel filler tube move it to and fro with slight pressure to insert it correctly CAUTION a The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue filling the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up a Be careful when filling diesel fuel from the spare canister danger of contami nating the body The diameter of the diesel pump nozzle can be identical to that of the petrol pump nozzle in some countries When driving in these countries the incorrect fu elling protection should be removed by a specialist company Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres containing a reserve of approx 7 litres Unleaded petrol First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 204 Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded fuel that complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON and
405. t to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident Rear fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light 0 comes on when the rear fog light is switched on Further information page 56 Exhaust inspection system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the exhaust inspection system The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage Instruments and warning lights 17 ov Glow plug system diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light o gt comes on after the ignition has been switched on Once the light has gone out the engine can be started immediately There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light 0 does not come on at all or lights up continuously If the warning light o gt begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage EPC Engine performance check petrol engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light EPC lights up there is a fault in the engine control The system allo
406. tacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been re moved the closing process is only stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again Window convenience operation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 44 Convenience opening closing of all windows can be operated by locking unlock ing the vehicle as follows Settings the window convenience operation Infotainment owner s manual chapter Vehicle settings button CAR The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly is the automatic opening closing of all windows is operational Opening and closing can take place in one of the following ways Opening gt Press and hold the symbol button on the remote control key gt Hold the key in the driv
407. te a Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids a Fluids with the correct specifications can be purchased from SKODA Original Ac cessories 208 General Maintenance Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 180 Securing the bonnet First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 206 When the front door is closed the bonnet cannot be unlocked with lever 1 Fig 179 Opening gt Open the front door gt Pull the release lever under the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 179 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be dam aged gt Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 and the bonnet is un locked gt Grab hold of the bonnet and lift gt Take the bonnet support out of its holder 3 Fig 180 in the direction if the arrow and secure the opened bonnet by inserting the end of the support in the opening 4 designed for it Closing gt Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support Insert the bonnet sup port into the holder 3 designed to hold it gt Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm do not push it in Check whether the bonnet has been closed properly Also make sure a vehicle with an opened bonnet does not appear in the instrument cluster dis
408. tem wizard by pressing the button B or the adjustment wheel Fig 8 the systems Front Assist and Lane Assist can be enabled or disabled The menu item wizard in the main menu can also be opened by pressing the but ton E on the control lever Fig 9 i Note If warning messages are shown in the information display these messages must be confirmed with the button B on the operating lever Fig 8 or with the ad justment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to call up the main menu 28 Using the system CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information overview _ 88 Select information 30 Memory 30 Warning at excessive speeds BT The multifunction display only operates if the ignition is switched on After the ignition is switched on the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition Individual menu items can be shown or hidden in the Infotainment Bedienung sanleitung Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button E WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle pii Note In some national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of measure ment Information overview First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 28 Range The range indicates the distance you can s
409. tes the manoeuvring procedure if one of the following cases arises gt Speed of more than 7 km h exceeded during the manoeuvring procedure gt System button pressed gt TCS system switched off gt Intervention of the driver in the automatic steering procedure stops the steer ing wheel gt There is a system fault system temporarily not available gt Automatic braking for damage limitation If any of the above events occurs the following warning message is dis played page 140 Automatic brake assist First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 137 The system provides assistance to the driver with automatic brake assist The au tomatic brake assist does not exempt the driver from his her responsibility for the accelerator brake and clutch 140 Driving Automatic braking for preventing cancellations caused by excessive speeds To prevent the speed from exceeding 7 km h and to subsequently prevent can cellation of the parking procedure automatic brake support is initiated The park ing procedure can be resumed after automatic braking Automatic braking takes place only once per parking procedure Automatic braking for damage limitation The system detects an imminent collision based on the driving speed and the dis tance from the obstacle automatic brake support is initiated The system function is ended after this automatic brake assist for damage limita tion
410. the user different kinds of feedback Display warning light B Fig 113 Lights up green for around 2 seconds The auxiliary heating has been switch ed on Lights up red for around 2 seconds The auxiliary heating has been switch ed off Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec onds The ignition signal was not received Quickly flashes green for around 2 sec onds The auxiliary heating is blocked e g because the tank is nearly empty or there is a fault in the auxiliary heating Flashes red for around 2 seconds The switch off signal was not received Lights up orange for around 2 seconds then green or red The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was received Lights up orange for around 2 seconds then flashes green or red The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived Flashes orange for around 5 seconds Replace the battery page 239 CAUTION The battery is discharged however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore be protected against water severe impacts and direct sunlight 112 Using the system E WARNING Continued Driving a f the steering wheel is adjusted further towards the head the protection provided by the driver airbag in the event of an accident is reduced Check that the steering wheel is a
411. the obstacle at the front is less than around 90 cm gt The distance to the obstacle at the front is less than around 30 cm gt The distance to the obstacle to the side of the vehicle is less than around 30 cm After activation the following is shown in the left pane of the Infotainment dis play Fig 131 on page 136 B Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around 50 cm Automatic display can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment nfotain ment manual chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Road display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 The display of the upcoming road changes depending on the steering angle A Fig 131 on page 136 A Obstacles that are located on the road are represented by the following colours gt Red the distance to the obstacle is less than about 30 cm gt Yellow the distance to the obstacle is more than about 30 cm Obstacles that are not located on the road are represented by the following col ours gt Red the distance to the obstacle is less than about 30 cm gt White the distance to the obstacle is more than about 30 cm The road ahead is displayed when a forward gear or Neutral is engaged or the se lector lever is in position N The road behind the vehicle is displayed when reverse gear is engaged or the se lector lever is in position R CQO Intro
412. the warning icon flashes the engine oil pressure is too low The following message is shown in the information cluster display Oil pressure Stop Log book STOP VEHICLE OIL PRESSURE Instruments and warning lights 21 Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 211 Checking the oil level Even if the oil level is correct do not drive any further if the warning icon is flashing Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a specialist garage Engine oil level First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 20 Engine oil level too low If the warning icons and A are lit the engine oil level is too low The following message is shown in the information cluster display Oil level top up oil TOPUP OIL Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 211 The warning icon will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds If no engine oil has been replenished the warning icon will come on again after driving about 100 km Engine oil level too high If the warning icons and A are lit in conjunction with the following message on the display the engine oil level is too high Reduce oil level 8 OILLEVEL TOO HIGH Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 211 Engine oil level sensor If the wa
413. through the body of water a Do not drive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Any vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water ai Note You can adjust the Xenon headlights yourself by setting the tourist light mode in Infotainment Operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle set After driving through water we recommend having the vehicle checked by a spe tings button CAR cialist garage a E Note You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist ga rage m This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unleaded petrol 131 Headlights 131 In certain countries it is also possible that the KODA Partner network is limited or has not been established yet This is the reason why procuring certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able to make limited repairs E Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 131 A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded pet rol page 205 Information regarding the locations of filling stations that offer unleaded petrol is for example provided by the automobile associations a Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 131 The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of the road on which the ve
414. tification monochromatic display additional notification colour display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 161 The detected traffic signs are indicated in the display of the instrument clus ter page 28 Driving data Multifunction display Driving data Traffic sign Additional display If the menu item Traffic sign is currently not shown Fig 152 A the road sign with the speed limit will appear in the upper display area of the instrument clus ter Fig 152 B c If several traffic signs are detected simultaneously the next traffic sign will also in some cases be displayed in the colour display c All detected traffic signs can be displayed in the menu item Traffic sign A The additional display traffic sign detection can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button 162 Driving Traffic sign display when towing a trailer When towing a trailer displaying the traffic signs which apply when towing a trailer can be activated The traffic sign detection display when towing a trailer can be activated deactiva ted in the Infotainment operating instructions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings
415. till drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and the same style of driving as before The display is shown in steps of 10 km After lighting up of the warning icon H the display is shown in steps of 5 km The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate the range The range can increase if you drive in a more fuel efficient manner Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated since the last time the memory was erased page 30 If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time you must set the memory at the start of the new measurement to zero Fig 10 on page 30 After erasing the memory no fuel consumption data will appear for the first 100 m driven The fuel consumption data is updated continuously while you are driving Current fuel consumption You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel con sumption The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Oil temperature If the engine oil temperature is in the range 80 110 C the engine operating tem perature is reached If the temperature lies below 80 C or above 110 C avoid high engine revs full throttle and high engine loads If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present are displayed instead of the oil temperature
416. ting If the warning light 5 lights up there is a fault in the ASR The following message is shown in the information cluster display Error Traction control ASRERROR Seek help from a specialist garage If the warning light 5 comes on after starting the engine the TCS may be switch ed off for technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light 2 does not light up after you switch the engine back on the TCS is fully functional again Further information page 132 and page 133 Traction Control System TCS Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light amp comes on after switching on the ignition If the warning light does not go out after moving a short distance this means there is an error in the system Seek help from a specialist garage lt Traction control system TCS off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light amp is lit the TCS is off The following message is shown in the information cluster display Traction control ASR deactivated ASROFF Further information page 133 Traction Control System TCS 2 Electronic Stability Control ESC First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 A flashing warning light 5 shows that the ESC system is currently operating If the warning light amp lights up there
417. tion a If not all fields around the vehicle are shown after the system is activated the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or in reverse a If the system is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in the position P the vehicle cannot move the warning signal is interrupted and no obstacles are displayed a Additional mounted modules such as a bicycle carrier can impair the function of the parking aid Assist systems 135 Function Fig 130 Parking aid Range of sensors parking aid button on vehicles with front and rear sensors A ParkPilot Gy Ok Safe to move Fig 131 road display compact display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 The parking aid hereafter only referred to as system works only when the igni tion is switched on The system supports the driver using acoustic signals Infotainment display when parking and manoeuvring The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the bumper and an obstacle The ultrasound sensors are integrated in the front rear bumper 136 Driving Explanation of graphic range of sensors in the vicinity of the vehicle Area Fig 130 Range of sensors a These are only the approximate ranges of sensors b Applies only for vehicles with 12 sensors The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is re duced
418. tions for proper use of the seat belts The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belt webbing may im pair proper operation of the inertia reel page 200 The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt connections inertia reel or the lock is detected the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a specialist garage The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked i Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts 176 Safety The physical principle of a head on collision A BNH 0133 Fig 161 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear seat passenger without a fastened seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 As soon as the vehicle is moving so called kinetic energy the energy of motion is produced both in terms of the car as well as in terms of the occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy
419. to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to in juries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct a There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag Fig 165 Driver airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the gu WARNING dash panel Front airbag and transporting children a Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a prop er restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 185 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats Fig 166 Safe distance to steering wheel inflated airbags ig WARNING General AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 181 The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side mu
420. to the vehicle ahead to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The driver must always be ready to take over steering of the vehicle himself accelerate or brake Note a The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden by notifications for other functions An ACC notification automatically appears for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC Instructions and Information First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 143 FJ warnine The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle such as traffic jams vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects Assist systems 143 HE WARNING Continued f the ACC does not decelerate fast enough immediately apply the vehicle s footbrake Control may only be resumed if the stored speed is not too high for the cur rent traffic conditions EI WARNING For safety reasons do not use the ACC under the following conditions a When driving in turning lanes motorway exits or construction sites to avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed a When visibility is poor e g fog heavy rain thick snowfall a When road conditions are poor e g ice slippery road gravel dirt road a When driving around sharp bends a W
421. top lid position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Adjusting gt Stop the lid in the desired position electrically or manually gt Press and hold the button B Fig 22 on page 42 for longer than 3 seconds Storing the new position is confirmed with an audible signal Delete gt Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position gt Press and hold the button B Fig 22 on page 42 for longer than 3 seconds An audible signal sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted from the memory while the basic position of the top lid position is again set The top lid position is adjusted for example in the following situations gt When the space for opening the lid is limited e g garage height gt For a more convenient operation such as by a person s height The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically is always lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is opened manually The lid always opens to the height which was last stored Malfunctions First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the lid is open it is necessa ry to activate the system of the electric boot lid Activation means closing the lid by hand Thus the end position of the lid is stored under fully closed in secured lock
422. towing device ball rod First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 164 The ball rod can be removed and can be found in the spare wheel well or ina compartment for the spare wheel in the boot page 228 Explanation of graphic 1 13 pin power socket Safety eye Mounting recess Cap Dust cap Ball rod Operating lever Lock cap Trigger pin 0 Keys Locking ball i Note If you lose the key please get in touch with a specialist garage alke N leee Setting the ready position Fig 154 Setting the ready position ready position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 164 Before installing always adjust the ball rod in the ready position gt Turn the key 1 so that its red mark is visible Fig 154 gt Grab the ball rod underneath the protective cap 2 gt Press the trigger pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow The lever remains locked in this position CAUTION In the ready position the key cannot be removed nor turned into a different posi tion Installing the ball rod Fig 155 Insert the ball rod lock up the lock and put the lock cover on First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 164 gt Pull of the cap 4 Fig 153 on page 164 downwards
423. travel faster than 80 km h Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into con tact with the skin SA For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in ac cordance with environmental protection regulations Note Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit or con sult a specialist garage about repair options Breakdown kit Fig 200 Components of the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 232 The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment Components of the breakdown kit 1 Valve remover Sticker with speed designation max 80 km h Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core BEN el eal The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core This is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre valve The same also applies to the replacement valve core 1 Note Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions f
424. tting down the engine 154 Warning icon 23 Start and stop the engine KESSY 116 Start and stop the engine with the key 114 Starting the engine Jump starting 235 Key 115 see KESSY 118 START STOP Information messages 156 Jump starting 236 Steering force assistance 114 Steering wheel 114 Stopping the engine Key 116 Stopwatch 26 Storage compartment in rear centre console __ 82 Storage compartment on the passenger side __ 81 Storage compartments 74 Storage compartment under the passenger seat _ 81 Storage places 74 Storing skis 84 Sun screen 61 Sun visors 61 Switching off the engine see KESSY 118 Switching off the ignition see KESSY 118 Switching on the ignition see KESSY 118 T Taking care of the vehicle Natural leather 199 Seat belts 200 Taking care of your vehicle 193 Automatic car wash system 193 Cavity protection 197 Chrome parts 196 Cleaning the wheels 197 Decorative films 196 Door lock cylinders 197 Headlight lenses 197 High pressure cleaner 194 Plastic parts 195 Polishing the paintwork 195 Rubber seals 195 Taking care of the interior 198 Taking care of your vehicle exterior 194 Washing 193 Washing by hand 193 Wash system 193 Wax treatment 195 Taking care of your vehicles Fabric covers 200 TCS Operation 133 Warning light 17 Technical data 254 Tiptronic 12
425. tton or in the information dis play page 28 Menu item wizard By disabling the system the proximity warning system and the advance warning are also deactivated Activate deactivate proximity warning The proximity warning indicator can be activated deactivated in the Infotain ment Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings CAR button The set proximity warning remains active even after stopping and starting the ig nition Activate deactivate advance warning The advance warning can be activated deactivated in the Infotainment Info tainment manual chapter Vehicle settings CAR button The set advance warning remains active even after stopping and starting the ig nition City Emergency braking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 149 The City Emergency braking function From here on referred to only as the emer gency brake function is a component of the Front Assist system The emergency brake function assists the driver when driving as follows gt Prepares the brakes for emergency braking prior to a detected danger gt If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger an automatic brake action oc curs with stopping power that increases in several stages The emergency brake function intervenes when driving between about 5 km h and 30 km h The emergency brake function is automatically activated or deactivated together with the Front Assist s
426. ty the window and reduce visibility CAUTION a The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direction to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass a Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand or salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors there is a risk of dam age to the surface of the windows and mirrors a Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water risk of cracks forming in the glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage a Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents there is a risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial Headlight lenses First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 194 Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean warm water and soap CAUTION a Never wipe headlights to dry a Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses as this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the headlight lenses Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the head lights as this could damage the headlight lenses Door lock cylinders First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 Specific products must be used for d
427. tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit H gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved continue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km h Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes page 234 234 Do it yourself EI warnine a During inflation the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot risk of injury Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials risk of fire a If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sus tained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest risk of over heating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again Check after 10 minutes driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 232 Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not drive the vehicle
428. uggage compartment Spare wheel 1 Does not apply to vehicles with the Infotainment Blues and Swing system 224 General Maintenance First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 191 Take out wheel gt Open the boot lid gt Raise the floor covering in the boot page 94 gt Remove the box with the tool kit gt Pull out safety lock 1 Fig 191 in a clockwise direction gt Unscrew the 2 bolt in a counterclockwise direction gt Remove the wheel Store wheel away gt Place the replaced wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward gt Screw in bolt 2 Fig 191 in a clockwise direction until the wheel is secure gt Insert safety lock 1 Fig 191 in the opposite direction to which the arrow is pointing gt Replace the box with the toolkit into the spare wheel gt Fold back the floor covering in the boot page 94 gt Shut the boot lid Install a wheel having the appropriate version and dimensions as soon as possi ble If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adop ted H Temporary spare wheel
429. ulling on the seat backrest gt Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place EI warnine After placing skis into the through loading bag you must secure the bag with the securing strap B Fig 77 The strap A must hold the skis tight BE WARNING Continued a Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding also refer to imprint on the removable through loading bag The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24 kg i Note a The through loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis a Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips facing to the rear into the removable through loading bag a f there are several pairs of skis in the removable through loading bag ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height a The removable through loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fastening elements 86 Fixing nets 87 Folding double hooks 87 Foldable hooks Octavia Estate 88 Floor covering 88 Double sided floor covering 88 Luggage net 89 Luggage compartment cover 89 Roll up luggage compartment cover Octavia Estate 90 Stowing roll up luggage compartment cover and roof racks 91 Storage compartment in the luggage compartment 92 Storage compartments under the f
430. unter for the distance driven page 12 n Telephone gt Charge level indicator page 12 i GF room Fuel gauge page 11 16 5 Revolutions counter ER trp wu km First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 9 Fig 3 Display types The red scale of the rev counter 1 Fig 2 on page 9 indicates the range in which First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn the system begins to limit the engine speed The system automatically restricts ings H on page 9 the engine speed to a steady limit You should shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the revolution ane penne CIUete v nave pii at ie olen Dees or aspiay aera counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox A Segment display without multi function display Segment display with multi function display B c Monochromatic information display D Colour information display Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or too low page 26 SA For the sake of the environment Correct shifting up has the following advantages Speedometer a It helps to reduce fuel consumption l l a It reduces the operating noise First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn m t protects the environment ings H on page 9 a It benefits the durability and reliability of the engine Warning against excessive speeds An audible
431. up during the cold season of the year It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling ef fect Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air condi tioning system page 106 or for Climatronic page 109 FJ WARNING For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the windows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to cor rectly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to demist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode LI CAUTION a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e g ice snow or leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air con ditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is not a leak i Note a The used air streams out through the vents in the luggage compartment a We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the in terior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys tem This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is oper ating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense re placement of compressor Heating and air conditioning system 101 Air outlets
432. up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed a Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible a f the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are different from those it was fitted with at the works follow these guidelines page 222 New tyres FJ warnine Observe the following instructions for lifting the vehicle a f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away a Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent pos sible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc a Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose a Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed a Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack a Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack risk of in jury CAUTION a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts
433. urface are unfavourable The TCS function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system the ASR is integrated into the ESC system page 132 Assist systems 133 During an intervention of the system the TCS warning light amp flashes in the in strument cluster The TCS should normally always be switched on The system should be deactiva ted only in the following situations for example gt When driving with snow chains gt When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt When it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck The TCS can be deactivated in the Infotainment or with the symbol button ASR Fig 129 Infotainment manual chapter Vehicle settings CAR button a The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster when the TCR is deactiva ted Ensure the TCS is activated again afterwards Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 132 EDL If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey The EDL switches itself off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat genera tion in the disc brake of the wheel being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the sam
434. use the seat heaters if the seats are not occupied by persons or if ob jects such as a child seat bag etc are fastened or stored on them A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur Do not clean the seats using moisture page 200 i Note If the on board voltage drops the seat heating is switched off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control page 219 Au tomatic load deactivation Seats and useful equipment 71 Armrest front Fig 54 Adjust armrest AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 71 The armrest is adjustable for height and length Setting height gt First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 54 into one of the 4 fixed positions Move gt Move the lid into the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 54 The armrest includes a storage compartment underneath page 80 i Note Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand brake 72 Using the system Rear armrest AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 71 Folding forward gt Pull on the loop A Fig 55 and fold the arm rest forwards in the direction of the arrow A cup holder may be located in the armrest page 77 Folding front passenger seat Fig 56 Folding the front passenger seat forward
435. users Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants danger of death a Please note that the handling properties of the vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as the centre of gravity can be displaced risk of accident The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly a f the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with un suitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from moving around always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly attached to the lash ing eyes a The items carried in the luggage compartment must be stored in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward if any sudden driving or braking ma noeuvres are undertaken risk of injury Seats and useful equipment 85 HE WARNING Continued a When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en larged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats page 174 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poi soning Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle risk of accident Do not transport people in the luggage
436. ut 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member with out a load will use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aero dynamic drag Regular maintenance First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 126 A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage you create the conditions needed for economical driving The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Check the oil at regular intervals e g when filling up Oil consumption is depend ent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil consump tion could be as high as 0 5 litres 1000 km depending on your style of driving It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and rea ches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5000 km 2 For the sake of the environment a Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high lubricity oils a Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil
437. utlet 79 Multimedia holder 79 Storage compartment under the front armrest 80 Glasses storage box 80 Storage compartment on the passenger side gt gt Storage compartment under the passenger seat 81 Clothes hook 82 Map pockets on the front seats 82 Storage compartment in rear centre console 82 230 volt power 83 Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel gt gt 8 amp 4 Removable ski bag 84 Ey WARNING Storage compartment on the driver s side Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down when driving when accelerating or cornering and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic risk of accident a When driving ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes operate the clutch or accelerator risk of accident Fig 60 Storage compartment on the driver s side Car park ticket holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Fig 59 ings H on page 74 Windscreen Parking ticket hold er Opening gt Raise the handle A Fig 60 and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place FI WARNING First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn The storage compartment must always be closed when drivi
438. ve the load on the lid to re enable the electrical operation a f the lid closes automatically e g under load of snow you will hear an inter mittent beep 42 Using the system i Note In case of a fault switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ga rage Operating description B5E 0191 Fig 23 Lid operation operating areas First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Control elements The lid can be operated with the following control elements gt With the symbol button lt gt on the remote control key press for about 1s gt With the handle A on the outer part of the lid Fig 22 gt With the button B on the inner part of the lid Fig 22 gt With the button C in the centre console Fig 23 Operating areas The system distinguishes 3 operating areas where the function of the individual operating elements changes Fig 23 The end positions of the lid fully closed in the secured lock and fully opened differ as well The range of the area 3 changes proportionally depending on the setting of the top position of the lid page 44 If the lid is set in the uppermost position in the area 2 the area 3 is not active The range of the area 2 changes proportionally depending on the setting of the top position of the lid Symbol explanation in the operating description A Feasible action O Non feasible action Movem
439. ver 60 of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protection and coolant effectiveness a Other coolant additives that do not comply with the correct specifications can significantly reduce the anticorrosion effect a Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can conse quently result in major engine damage Do not fill the coolant above the mark A Fig 184 on page 213 a f a fault causes the engine to overheat we recommend visiting a specialist ga rage as otherwise serious engine damage may occur Capacity First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 212 Coolant capacity Petrol engines Capacities in litres 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI 1 4 Itr 103 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 132 kW TSI 2 0 Itr 162 kW TSI 1 On vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater auxiliary heating and ventilation the coolant ca pacity is approx 11 larger Diesel engines Capacities in litres 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR 8 4 2 0 1 105 110 135kW TDI CR MG DSG 11 6 11 9 Checking the coolant level Fig 184 Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 212 The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment Inspecting the coolant level gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the
440. via Estate Fig 106 Attachment points for roof bars First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 98 Installation location of the attachment points for roof bars Fig 106 A Front attachment points Rear attachment points Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the enclosed instructions Seats and useful equipment 99 Roof load First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 98 The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 75 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used In this case the roof rack system must only be loa ded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions 100 Using the system This chapter contains information on the following subjects Air outlets 102 Using the cooling system economically 102 Operational problems 103 The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The cooling system prevents the windows from misting
441. w chains Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 226 The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres Summer tyres on ice snee and at temperatures be low 7 C have less grip This is especially true of low profile tyres or high speed tyres To achieve the best possible handling properties winter tyres must be fitted on all 4 wheels the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must be no older than 4 years Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher The winter tyre speed limit is set in the Infotainment system operating instruc tions for Infotainment chapter Vehicle settings CAR button For the sake of the environment Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling prop erties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is also lower 226 General Maintenance Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 226 When driving on wintry roads snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels For technical reasons it is only permiss
442. wiper blades 241 Fuses and light bulbs 243 Fuses 243 Bulbs 247 Technical data _ o o i 254 Vehicle data 254 4 Table of Contents COzin g km discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilo metre N1 Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque TDI CR Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system Trailer stabilisation Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection Abbreviations 13 5 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 TI 12 j 3 Fig 1 Cockpit 6 Using the system Using the system Overview 1 Electrical power windows 2 Door opening lever on the driver s side 3 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 4 Air outlet vent on the driver s side 5 Operating lever gt Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher gt Speed regulating system gt Activating the menu item wizard gt Steering wheel gt With horn gt With driver s front airbag gt With keys for the Infotainment control Infotainment manual chapter Device Operation Instrument cluster gt NI Operating lever gt Windscreen wiper and wash system gt Multifunction display gt Information display Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel Infotainment owner s manual for the Infotainment radio or n
443. ws the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage r Safety Systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 Fault with airbag system When the warning light amp lights up and the following message appears in the in strument cluster display there is a fault with the airbag system Error Airbag AIRBAG ERROR The functionality of the airbag system is monitored automatically even if one of the airbags is switched off 18 Using the system One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic tool gt The warning light amp lights up for approx 4 seconds after switching on the igni tion and then flashes again for approx 12 seconds gt The following message is shown in the information cluster display Airbag belt tensioner deactivated AIRBAG BELT TENSIONER OFF The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch gt The warning light amp comes on for about 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt The warning light OFF in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG ON OFF in the middle of the dash panel lights up after switching on the ignition page 186 ProActive passenger protection When the warning light 2 lights up and the following message appears in the in strument cluster display there is a fault with the airbag system Seek help from a specialist garage ProActive passenger prot
444. xert more force for steering page 114 Adaptive headlights AHL The headlights adapt to the driving style more dynamically than in mode Normal page 54 ProActive passenger protection The first level of protection is deactivated page 158 Mode Eco First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 156 This mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving and helps to save fuel Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems Engine drive The accelerator pedal is less responsive to depressing the pedal and the acceler ation is more relaxed than in mode Normal After pressing the button the acceleration occurs more relaxed than in mode Normal page 141 Cruise Control System The recommended gear is controlled such to achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption page 26 When the START STOP system was deactivated manually page 153 it is auto matically activated The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode E page 121 Adaptive headlights AHL The system is automatically deactivated page 54 Air conditioning Climatronic The air conditioning is controlled so as to save energy For this reason for exam ple it may take longer to reach the desired interior temperature in mode Normal Note a The Eco driving mode is not available when towing a trailer When the vehicle is connected electrically to a trailer and is in the Ec
445. y any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the mod ules Observe the following instructions for the proper seated position a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat page 190 Child safety and side airbag a There must not be any further persons animals as well as objects posi tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No ac cessories such as cup holders should be attached to the doors a f children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can re sult in serious injuries page 188 Child seat EI WARNING The airbag control unit operates with pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels e g additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage The following instructions must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the re sulting openings
446. y knocks when the trim is not yet inserted in the wheel rim This could cause damage to the guide and centring elements of the trim a Make sure that the anti theft wheel bolt is mounted in the bore in the region of the valve page 232 Securing wheels against theft a f wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system Wheel bolts Fig 132 Remove the cap First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 Pulling off gt Push the extraction pliers page 228 sufficiently far onto the cap until the in ner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap Fig 192 gt Remove the cap Install gt Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the stor age space for the spare wheel Wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 220 Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design Each time you fit other wheels e g light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres you must also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly Wheels 225 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Winter tyres 226 Sno
447. your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA service partner Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 Minor paint damage such as scratches scuffs or stone chips should be treated im mediately if possible using touch up pens or sprays Preserving the vehicle paintwork Thorough wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if the vehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards CAUTION a Never apply wax to the windows a Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment risk of paint scratches a Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides a If possible do not apply any paint ca
448. ystem If the emergency brake function triggers an automatic brake action the display of the instrument cluster shows the symbol Fig 143 on page 151 B FJ warninec The emergency brake function can slow down the vehicle to a complete standstill If the vehicle continues to roll forward after stopping then it should be stopped with the footbrake CAUTION Automatic braking interventions by the emergency brake function can be termi nated by pressing the clutch or the accelerator or by moving the steering wheel If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the emergency brake function the pressure in the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be oper ated with the normal pedal stroke Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 149 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Front Assist No sensor view The sensor is dirty or has no visibility Stop the car switch off the engine and clean the sensor or remove the obstacle causing the lack of visibility Fig 136 on page 144 If the message appears again after starting the engine the system should be disabled page 152 Seek help from a specialist garage Front Assist not available Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and then start it again If the message ap pears again after starting the engine the system should

&Scaron;KODA Octavia Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents